2 by Michael Elkins <me@cs.hmc.edu>
5 ``All mail clients suck. This one just sucks less.'' -me, circa 1995
6 ______________________________________________________________________
14 1.3 Software Distribution Sites
21 2.1 Moving Around in Menus
22 2.2 Editing Input Fields
23 2.3 Reading Mail - The Index and Pager
24 2.3.1 The Message Index
28 2.3.4 Miscellaneous Functions
30 2.4.1 Editing the message header
31 2.4.2 Using Mutt with PGP
32 2.4.3 Sending anonymous messages via mixmaster.
33 2.5 Forwarding and Bouncing Mail
35 2.7 Reading news via NNTP
39 3.1 Syntax of Initialization Files
40 3.2 Defining/Using aliases
41 3.3 Changing the default key bindings
42 3.4 Defining aliases for character sets
43 3.5 Setting variables based upon mailbox
45 3.7 Using color and mono video attributes
46 3.8 Ignoring (weeding) unwanted message headers
47 3.9 Alternative addresses
49 3.11 Using Multiple spool mailboxes
50 3.12 Defining mailboxes which receive mail
51 3.13 User defined headers
52 3.14 Defining the order of headers when viewing messages
53 3.15 Specify default save filename
54 3.16 Specify default Fcc: mailbox when composing
55 3.17 Specify default save filename and default Fcc: mailbox at once
56 3.18 Change settings based upon message recipients
57 3.19 Change settings before formatting a message
58 3.20 Choosing the cryptographic key of the recipient
59 3.21 Adding key sequences to the keyboard buffer
60 3.22 Executing functions
63 3.25 Setting variables
64 3.26 Reading initialization commands from another file
69 4.1 Regular Expressions
71 4.2.1 Pattern Modifier
72 4.2.2 Complex Patterns
73 4.2.3 Searching by Date
76 4.4.1 Message Matching in Hooks
77 4.5 External Address Queries
80 4.8 Handling Mailing Lists
81 4.9 Delivery Status Notification (DSN) Support
82 4.10 POP3 Support (OPTIONAL)
83 4.11 IMAP Support (OPTIONAL)
84 4.11.1 The Folder Browser
86 4.12 Managing multiple IMAP/POP accounts (OPTIONAL)
87 4.13 Start a WWW Browser on URLs (EXTERNAL)
89 5. Mutt's MIME Support
91 5.1 Using MIME in Mutt
92 5.1.1 Viewing MIME messages in the pager
93 5.1.2 The Attachment Menu
94 5.1.3 The Compose Menu
95 5.2 MIME Type configuration with
96 5.3 MIME Viewer configuration with
97 5.3.1 The Basics of the mailcap file
98 5.3.2 Secure use of mailcap
99 5.3.3 Advanced mailcap Usage
100 5.3.3.1 Optional Fields
102 5.3.3.3 Command Expansion
103 5.3.4 Example mailcap files
105 5.5 MIME Multipart/Alternative
110 6.1 Command line options
111 6.2 Configuration Commands
112 6.3 Configuration variables
113 6.3.1 abort_nosubject
114 6.3.2 abort_unmodified
124 6.3.12 ask_x_comment_to
134 6.3.22 bounce_delivered
135 6.3.23 catchup_newsgroup
138 6.3.26 collapse_unread
139 6.3.27 uncollapse_jump
140 6.3.28 compose_format
143 6.3.31 connect_timeout
147 6.3.35 crypt_autosmime
152 6.3.40 digest_collapse
153 6.3.41 display_filter
154 6.3.42 dotlock_program
157 6.3.45 duplicate_threads
169 6.3.57 followup_to_poster
171 6.3.59 forward_decode
173 6.3.61 forward_format
177 6.3.65 group_index_format
184 6.3.72 hide_top_limited
185 6.3.73 hide_top_missing
187 6.3.75 honor_followup_to
189 6.3.77 ignore_list_reply_to
190 6.3.78 imap_authenticators
191 6.3.79 imap_delim_chars
192 6.3.80 imap_force_ssl
193 6.3.81 imap_home_namespace
194 6.3.82 imap_keepalive
195 6.3.83 imap_list_subscribed
199 6.3.87 imap_servernoise
201 6.3.89 implicit_autoview
211 6.3.99 mailcap_sanitize
212 6.3.100 maildir_trash
222 6.3.110 mh_seq_flagged
223 6.3.111 mh_seq_replied
224 6.3.112 mh_seq_unseen
226 6.3.114 mime_forward_decode
227 6.3.115 mime_forward_rest
229 6.3.117 mix_entry_format
232 6.3.120 message_format
234 6.3.122 news_cache_dir
238 6.3.126 nntp_load_description
242 6.3.130 nntp_reconnect
244 6.3.132 pager_context
246 6.3.134 pager_index_lines
248 6.3.136 crypt_autosign
249 6.3.137 crypt_autoencrypt
250 6.3.138 pgp_ignore_subkeys
251 6.3.139 crypt_replyencrypt
252 6.3.140 crypt_replysign
253 6.3.141 crypt_replysignencrypted
254 6.3.142 crypt_timestamp
255 6.3.143 pgp_use_gpg_agent
256 6.3.144 crypt_verify_sig
257 6.3.145 smime_is_default
258 6.3.146 smime_ask_cert_label
259 6.3.147 smime_decrypt_use_default_key
260 6.3.148 pgp_entry_format
261 6.3.149 pgp_good_sign
262 6.3.150 pgp_check_exit
264 6.3.152 pgp_retainable_sigs
265 6.3.153 pgp_show_unusable
267 6.3.155 pgp_strict_enc
269 6.3.157 pgp_sort_keys
270 6.3.158 pgp_create_traditional
271 6.3.159 pgp_auto_traditional
272 6.3.160 pgp_decode_command
273 6.3.161 pgp_getkeys_command
274 6.3.162 pgp_verify_command
275 6.3.163 pgp_decrypt_command
276 6.3.164 pgp_clearsign_command
277 6.3.165 pgp_sign_command
278 6.3.166 pgp_encrypt_sign_command
279 6.3.167 pgp_encrypt_only_command
280 6.3.168 pgp_import_command
281 6.3.169 pgp_export_command
282 6.3.170 pgp_verify_key_command
283 6.3.171 pgp_list_secring_command
284 6.3.172 pgp_list_pubring_command
285 6.3.173 forward_decrypt
286 6.3.174 smime_timeout
287 6.3.175 smime_encrypt_with
289 6.3.177 smime_ca_location
290 6.3.178 smime_certificates
291 6.3.179 smime_decrypt_command
292 6.3.180 smime_verify_command
293 6.3.181 smime_verify_opaque_command
294 6.3.182 smime_sign_command
295 6.3.183 smime_sign_opaque_command
296 6.3.184 smime_encrypt_command
297 6.3.185 smime_pk7out_command
298 6.3.186 smime_get_cert_command
299 6.3.187 smime_get_signer_cert_command
300 6.3.188 smime_import_cert_command
301 6.3.189 smime_get_cert_email_command
302 6.3.190 smime_default_key
304 6.3.192 certificate_file
305 6.3.193 ssl_usesystemcerts
307 6.3.195 ssl_use_sslv2
308 6.3.196 ssl_use_sslv3
309 6.3.197 ssl_use_tlsv1
313 6.3.201 pop_authenticators
314 6.3.202 pop_auth_try_all
315 6.3.203 pop_checkinterval
319 6.3.207 pop_reconnect
322 6.3.210 post_indent_string
323 6.3.211 post_moderated
328 6.3.216 print_command
332 6.3.220 query_command
344 6.3.232 reverse_alias
346 6.3.234 reverse_realname
347 6.3.235 rfc2047_parameters
352 6.3.240 score_threshold_delete
353 6.3.241 score_threshold_flag
354 6.3.242 score_threshold_read
357 6.3.245 sendmail_wait
359 6.3.247 save_unsubscribed
360 6.3.248 show_new_news
361 6.3.249 show_only_unread
365 6.3.253 simple_search
376 6.3.264 status_format
377 6.3.265 status_on_top
378 6.3.266 strict_threads
381 6.3.269 thread_received
382 6.3.270 thorough_search
417 7.2 About this document
419 ______________________________________________________________________
421 \e[1m1. Introduction
\e[0m
423 \e[1mMutt
\e[22mis a small but very powerful text-based MIME mail client. Mutt
424 is highly configurable, and is well suited to the mail power user with
425 advanced features like key bindings, keyboard macros, mail threading,
426 regular expression searches and a powerful pattern matching language
427 for selecting groups of messages.
429 \e[1m1.1. Mutt Home Page
\e[0m
433 \e[1m1.2. Mailing Lists
\e[0m
435 To subscribe to one of the following mailing lists, send a message
436 with the word
\e[4msubscribe
\e[24m in the body to list-name
\e[4m-request
\e[24m@mutt.org.
438 · mutt-announce@mutt.org -- low traffic list for announcements
440 · mutt-users@mutt.org -- help, bug reports and feature requests
442 · mutt-dev@mutt.org -- development mailing list
444 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mall messages posted to
\e[4mmutt-announce
\e[24m are automatically forwarded
445 to
\e[4mmutt-users
\e[24m, so you do not need to be subscribed to both lists.
447 \e[1m1.3. Software Distribution Sites
\e[0m
449 · ftp://ftp.mutt.org/mutt/
451 For a list of mirror sites, please refer to
452 http://www.mutt.org/download.html.
456 Visit channel
\e[4m#mutt
\e[24m on irc.freenode.net (www.freenode.net) to chat
457 with other people interested in Mutt.
459 \e[1m1.5. USENET
\e[0m
461 See the newsgroup comp.mail.mutt.
463 \e[1m1.6. Copyright
\e[0m
465 Mutt is Copyright (C) 1996-2000 Michael R. Elkins <me@cs.hmc.edu> and
468 This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
469 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
470 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at
471 your option) any later version.
473 This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
474 WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
475 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
476 General Public License for more details.
478 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
479 along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
480 Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA.
482 \e[1m2. Getting Started
\e[0m
484 This section is intended as a brief overview of how to use Mutt.
485 There are many other features which are described elsewhere in the
486 manual. There is even more information available in the Mutt FAQ and
487 various web pages. See the Mutt Page for more details.
489 The keybindings described in this section are the defaults as
490 distributed. Your local system administrator may have altered the
491 defaults for your site. You can always type ``?'' in any menu to
492 display the current bindings.
494 The first thing you need to do is invoke mutt, simply by typing mutt
495 at the command line. There are various command-line options, see
496 either the mutt man page or the ``reference''.
498 \e[1m2.1. Moving Around in Menus
\e[0m
500 Information is presented in menus, very similar to ELM. Here is a
501 table showing the common keys used to navigate menus in Mutt.
503 j or Down next-entry move to the next entry
504 k or Up previous-entry move to the previous entry
505 z or PageDn page-down go to the next page
506 Z or PageUp page-up go to the previous page
507 = or Home first-entry jump to the first entry
508 * or End last-entry jump to the last entry
509 q quit exit the current menu
510 ? help list all keybindings for the current menu
512 2
\b2.
\b.2
\b2.
\b. E
\bEd
\bdi
\bit
\bti
\bin
\bng
\bg I
\bIn
\bnp
\bpu
\but
\bt F
\bFi
\bie
\bel
\bld
\bds
\bs
514 Mutt has a builtin line editor which is used as the primary way to
515 input textual data such as email addresses or filenames. The keys
516 used to move around while editing are very similar to those of Emacs.
518 ^A or <Home> bol move to the start of the line
519 ^B or <Left> backward-char move back one char
520 Esc B backward-word move back one word
521 ^D or <Delete> delete-char delete the char under the cursor
522 ^E or <End> eol move to the end of the line
523 ^F or <Right> forward-char move forward one char
524 Esc F forward-word move forward one word
525 <Tab> complete complete filename or alias
526 ^T complete-query complete address with query
527 ^K kill-eol delete to the end of the line
528 ESC d kill-eow delete to the end ot the word
529 ^W kill-word kill the word in front of the cursor
530 ^U kill-line delete entire line
531 ^V quote-char quote the next typed key
532 <Up> history-up recall previous string from history
533 <Down> history-down recall next string from history
534 <BackSpace> backspace kill the char in front of the cursor
535 Esc u upcase-word convert word to upper case
536 Esc l downcase-word convert word to lower case
537 Esc c capitalize-word capitalize the word
539 <Return> n/a finish editing
541 You can remap the _
\be_
\bd_
\bi_
\bt_
\bo_
\br functions using the ``bind'' command. For
542 example, to make the _
\bD_
\be_
\bl_
\be_
\bt_
\be key delete the character in front of the
543 cursor rather than under, you could use
545 bind editor <delete> backspace
547 2
\b2.
\b.3
\b3.
\b. R
\bRe
\bea
\bad
\bdi
\bin
\bng
\bg M
\bMa
\bai
\bil
\bl -
\b- T
\bTh
\bhe
\be I
\bIn
\bnd
\bde
\bex
\bx a
\ban
\bnd
\bd P
\bPa
\bag
\bge
\ber
\br
549 Similar to many other mail clients, there are two modes in which mail
550 is read in Mutt. The first is the index of messages in the mailbox,
551 which is called the ``index'' in Mutt. The second mode is the display
552 of the message contents. This is called the ``pager.''
554 The next few sections describe the functions provided in each of these
557 2
\b2.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b1.
\b. T
\bTh
\bhe
\be M
\bMe
\bes
\bss
\bsa
\bag
\bge
\be I
\bIn
\bnd
\bde
\bex
\bx
559 c change to a different mailbox
560 ESC c change to a folder in read-only mode
561 C copy the current message to another mailbox
562 ESC C decode a message and copy it to a folder
563 ESC s decode a message and save it to a folder
564 D delete messages matching a pattern
565 d delete the current message
567 l show messages matching a pattern
568 N mark message as new
569 o change the current sort method
570 O reverse sort the mailbox
571 q save changes and exit
573 T tag messages matching a pattern
574 t toggle the tag on a message
575 ESC t toggle tag on entire message thread
576 U undelete messages matching a pattern
579 x abort changes and exit
580 <Return> display-message
581 <Tab> jump to the next new message
582 @ show the author's full e-mail address
583 $ save changes to mailbox
586 ^L clear and redraw the screen
587 ^T untag messages matching a pattern
589 2
\b2.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b1.
\b.1
\b1.
\b. S
\bSt
\bta
\bat
\btu
\bus
\bs F
\bFl
\bla
\bag
\bgs
\bs
591 In addition to who sent the message and the subject, a short summary
592 of the disposition of each message is printed beside the message
593 number. Zero or more of the following ``flags'' may appear, which
596 D
\bD message is deleted (is marked for deletion)
598 d
\bd message have attachments marked for deletion
600 K
\bK contains a PGP public key
606 P
\bP message is PGP encrypted
608 r
\br message has been replied to
610 S
\bS message is signed, and the signature is succesfully verified
612 s
\bs message is signed
614 !
\b! message is flagged
616 *
\b* message is tagged
618 Some of the status flags can be turned on or off using
620 · s
\bse
\bet
\bt-
\b-f
\bfl
\bla
\bag
\bg (default: w)
622 · c
\bcl
\ble
\bea
\bar
\br-
\b-f
\bfl
\bla
\bag
\bg (default: W)
624 Furthermore, the following flags reflect who the message is addressed
625 to. They can be customized with the ``$to_chars'' variable.
627 +
\b+ message is to you and you only
629 T
\bT message is to you, but also to or cc'ed to others
631 C
\bC message is cc'ed to you
633 F
\bF message is from you
635 L
\bL message is sent to a subscribed mailing list
637 2
\b2.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b2.
\b. T
\bTh
\bhe
\be P
\bPa
\bag
\bge
\ber
\br
639 By default, Mutt uses its builtin pager to display the body of
640 messages. The pager is very similar to the Unix program _
\bl_
\be_
\bs_
\bs though
641 not nearly as featureful.
643 <Return> go down one line
644 <Space> display the next page (or next message if at the end of a message)
645 - go back to the previous page
646 n search for next match
647 S skip beyond quoted text
648 T toggle display of quoted text
650 / search for a regular expression (pattern)
651 ESC / search backwards for a regular expression
652 \ toggle search pattern coloring
653 ^ jump to the top of the message
655 In addition, many of the functions from the
\e[4mindex
\e[24m are available in the
656 pager, such as
\e[4mdelete-message
\e[24m or
\e[4mcopy-message
\e[24m (this is one advantage
657 over using an external pager to view messages).
659 Also, the internal pager supports a couple other advanced features.
660 For one, it will accept and translate the ``standard'' nroff sequences
661 for bold and underline. These sequences are a series of either the
662 letter, backspace (^H), the letter again for bold or the letter,
663 backspace, ``_'' for denoting underline. Mutt will attempt to display
664 these in bold and underline respectively if your terminal supports
665 them. If not, you can use the bold and underline ``color'' objects to
666 specify a color or mono attribute for them.
668 Additionally, the internal pager supports the ANSI escape sequences
669 for character attributes. Mutt translates them into the correct color
670 and character settings. The sequences Mutt supports are:
672 ESC [ Ps;Ps;Ps;...;Ps m
679 3x Foreground color is x
680 4x Background color is x
692 Mutt uses these attributes for handling text/enriched messages, and
693 they can also be used by an external ``autoview'' script for
694 highlighting purposes. N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: If you change the colors for your
695 display, for example by changing the color associated with color2 for
696 your xterm, then that color will be used instead of green.
698 2
\b2.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b3.
\b. T
\bTh
\bhr
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bde
\bed
\bd M
\bMo
\bod
\bde
\be
700 When the mailbox is ``sorted'' by _
\bt_
\bh_
\br_
\be_
\ba_
\bd_
\bs, there are a few additional
701 functions available in the _
\bi_
\bn_
\bd_
\be_
\bx and _
\bp_
\ba_
\bg_
\be_
\br modes.
703 ^D delete-thread delete all messages in the current thread
704 ^U undelete-thread undelete all messages in the current thread
705 ^N next-thread jump to the start of the next thread
706 ^P previous-thread jump to the start of the previous thread
707 ^R read-thread mark the current thread as read
708 ESC d delete-subthread delete all messages in the current subthread
709 ESC u undelete-subthread undelete all messages in the current subthread
710 ESC n next-subthread jump to the start of the next subthread
711 ESC p previous-subthread jump to the start of the previous subthread
712 ESC r read-subthread mark the current subthread as read
713 ESC t tag-thread toggle the tag on the current thread
714 ESC v collapse-thread toggle collapse for the current thread
715 ESC V collapse-all toggle collapse for all threads
716 P parent-message jump to parent message in thread
718 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: Collapsing a thread displays only the first message in the
719 thread and hides the others. This is useful when threads contain so
720 many messages that you can only see a handful of threads on the
721 screen. See %M in ``$index_format''. For example, you could use
722 "%?M?(#%03M)&(%4l)?" in ``$index_format'' to optionally display the
723 number of hidden messages if the thread is collapsed.
725 See also: ``$strict_threads''.
727 \e[1m2.3.4. Miscellaneous Functions
\e[0m
729 \e[1mcreate-alias
\e[22m(default: a)
731 Creates a new alias based upon the current message (or prompts for a
732 new one). Once editing is complete, an ``alias'' command is added to
733 the file specified by the ``$alias_file'' variable for future use.
734 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mSpecifying an ``$alias_file'' does not add the aliases specified
735 there-in, you must also ``source'' the file.
737 \e[1mcheck-traditional-pgp
\e[22m(default: ESC P)
739 This function will search the current message for content signed or
740 encrypted with PGP the "traditional" way, that is, without proper MIME
741 tagging. Technically, this function will temporarily change the MIME
742 content types of the body parts containing PGP data; this is similar
743 to the ``edit-type'' function's effect.
745 \e[1mdisplay-toggle-weed
\e[22m(default: h)
747 Toggles the weeding of message header fields specified by ``ignore''
750 \e[1medit
\e[22m(default: e)
752 This command (available in the ``index'' and ``pager'') allows you to
753 edit the raw current message as it's present in the mail folder.
754 After you have finished editing, the changed message will be appended
755 to the current folder, and the original message will be marked for
759 (default: ^E on the attachment menu, and in the pager and index menus;
760 ^T on the compose menu)
762 This command is used to temporarily edit an attachment's content type
763 to fix, for instance, bogus character set parameters. When invoked
764 from the index or from the pager, you'll have the opportunity to edit
765 the top-level attachment's content type. On the ``attachment menu'',
766 you can change any attachment's content type. These changes are not
767 persistent, and get lost upon changing folders.
769 Note that this command is also available on the ``compose menu''.
770 There, it's used to fine-tune the properties of attachments you are
773 \e[1menter-command
\e[22m(default: ``:'')
775 This command is used to execute any command you would normally put in
776 a configuration file. A common use is to check the settings of
777 variables, or in conjunction with ``macros'' to change settings on the
780 \e[1mextract-keys
\e[22m(default: ^K)
782 This command extracts PGP public keys from the current or tagged
783 message(s) and adds them to your PGP public key ring.
785 \e[1mforget-passphrase
\e[22m(default: ^F)
787 This command wipes the passphrase(s) from memory. It is useful, if you
788 misspelled the passphrase.
790 \e[1mlist-reply
\e[22m(default: L)
792 Reply to the current or tagged message(s) by extracting any addresses
793 which match the regular expressions given by the ``lists or
794 subscribe'' commands, but also honor any Mail-Followup-To header(s) if
795 the ``$honor_followup_to'' configuration variable is set. Using this
796 when replying to messages posted to mailing lists helps avoid
797 duplicate copies being sent to the author of the message you are
800 \e[1mpipe-message
\e[22m(default: |)
802 Asks for an external Unix command and pipes the current or tagged
803 message(s) to it. The variables ``$pipe_decode'', ``$pipe_split'',
804 ``$pipe_sep'' and ``$wait_key'' control the exact behaviour of this
807 \e[1mresend-message
\e[22m(default: ESC e)
809 With resend-message, mutt takes the current message as a template for
810 a new message. This function is best described as "recall from
811 arbitrary folders". It can conveniently be used to forward MIME
812 messages while preserving the original mail structure. Note that the
813 amount of headers included here depends on the value of the ``$weed''
816 This function is also available from the attachment menu. You can use
817 this to easily resend a message which was included with a bounce
818 message as a message/rfc822 body part.
820 s
\bsh
\bhe
\bel
\bll
\bl-
\b-e
\bes
\bsc
\bca
\bap
\bpe
\be (default: !)
822 Asks for an external Unix command and executes it. The ``$wait_key''
823 can be used to control whether Mutt will wait for a key to be pressed
824 when the command returns (presumably to let the user read the output
825 of the command), based on the return status of the named command.
827 t
\bto
\bog
\bgg
\bgl
\ble
\be-
\b-q
\bqu
\buo
\bot
\bte
\bed
\bd (default: T)
829 The _
\bp_
\ba_
\bg_
\be_
\br uses the ``$quote_regexp'' variable to detect quoted text
830 when displaying the body of the message. This function toggles the
831 display of the quoted material in the message. It is particularly
832 useful when are interested in just the response and there is a large
833 amount of quoted text in the way.
835 s
\bsk
\bki
\bip
\bp-
\b-q
\bqu
\buo
\bot
\bte
\bed
\bd (default: S)
837 This function will go to the next line of non-quoted text which come
838 after a line of quoted text in the internal pager.
840 2
\b2.
\b.4
\b4.
\b. S
\bSe
\ben
\bnd
\bdi
\bin
\bng
\bg M
\bMa
\bai
\bil
\bl
842 The following bindings are available in the _
\bi_
\bn_
\bd_
\be_
\bx for sending
845 m compose compose a new message
846 r reply reply to sender
847 g group-reply reply to all recipients
848 L list-reply reply to mailing list address
849 f forward forward message
850 b bounce bounce (remail) message
851 ESC k mail-key mail a PGP public key to someone
853 Bouncing a message sends the message as is to the recipient you
854 specify. Forwarding a message allows you to add comments or modify
855 the message you are forwarding. These items are discussed in greater
856 detail in the next chapter ````Forwarding and Bouncing Mail''''.
858 Mutt will then enter the _
\bc_
\bo_
\bm_
\bp_
\bo_
\bs_
\be menu and prompt you for the
859 recipients to place on the ``To:'' header field. Next, it will ask
860 you for the ``Subject:'' field for the message, providing a default if
861 you are replying to or forwarding a message. See also ``$askcc'',
862 ``$askbcc'', ``$autoedit'', ``$bounce'', and ``$fast_reply'' for
863 changing how Mutt asks these questions.
865 Mutt will then automatically start your ``$editor'' on the message
866 body. If the ``$edit_headers'' variable is set, the headers will be
867 at the top of the message in your editor. Any messages you are
868 replying to will be added in sort order to the message, with
869 appropriate ``$attribution'', ``$indent_string'' and
870 ``$post_indent_string''. When forwarding a message, if the
871 ``$mime_forward'' variable is unset, a copy of the forwarded message
872 will be included. If you have specified a ``$signature'', it will be
873 appended to the message.
875 Once you have finished editing the body of your mail message, you are
876 returned to the _
\bc_
\bo_
\bm_
\bp_
\bo_
\bs_
\be menu. The following options are available:
878 a attach-file attach a file
879 A attach-message attach message(s) to the message
880 ESC k attach-key attach a PGP public key
881 d edit-description edit description on attachment
882 D detach-file detach a file
883 t edit-to edit the To field
884 ESC f edit-from edit the From field
885 r edit-reply-to edit the Reply-To field
886 c edit-cc edit the Cc field
887 b edit-bcc edit the Bcc field
888 y send-message send the message
889 s edit-subject edit the Subject
890 S smime-menu select S/MIME options
891 f edit-fcc specify an ``Fcc'' mailbox
892 p pgp-menu select PGP options
893 P postpone-message postpone this message until later
894 q quit quit (abort) sending the message
895 w write-fcc write the message to a folder
896 i ispell check spelling (if available on your system)
897 ^F forget-passphrase wipe passphrase(s) from memory
899 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: The attach-message function will prompt you for a folder to
900 attach messages from. You can now tag messages in that folder and they
901 will be attached to the message you are sending. Note that certain
902 operations like composing a new mail, replying, forwarding, etc. are
903 not permitted when you are in that folder. The %r in
904 ``$status_format'' will change to a 'A' to indicate that you are in
907 \e[1m2.4.1. Editing the message header
\e[0m
909 When editing the header of your outgoing message, there are a couple
910 of special features available.
913 Fcc:
\e[4mfilename
\e[0m
914 Mutt will pick up
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m just as if you had used the
\e[4medit-fcc
\e[0m
915 function in the
\e[4mcompose
\e[24m menu.
917 You can also attach files to your message by specifying
918 Attach:
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m [
\e[4mdescription
\e[24m ]
919 where
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m is the file to attach and
\e[4mdescription
\e[24m is an optional
920 string to use as the description of the attached file.
922 When replying to messages, if you remove the
\e[4mIn-Reply-To:
\e[24m field from
923 the header field, Mutt will not generate a
\e[4mReferences:
\e[24m field, which
924 allows you to create a new message thread.
926 Also see ``edit_headers''.
928 \e[1m2.4.2. Using Mutt with PGP
\e[0m
930 If you want to use PGP, you can specify
932 Pgp: [ E | S | S
\e[4m<id>
\e[24m ]
934 ``E'' encrypts, ``S'' signs and ``S<id>'' signs with the given key,
935 setting ``$pgp_sign_as'' permanently.
937 If you have told mutt to PGP encrypt a message, it will guide you
938 through a key selection process when you try to send the message.
939 Mutt will not ask you any questions about keys which have a certified
940 user ID matching one of the message recipients' mail addresses.
941 However, there may be situations in which there are several keys,
942 weakly certified user ID fields, or where no matching keys can be
945 In these cases, you are dropped into a menu with a list of keys from
946 which you can select one. When you quit this menu, or mutt can't find
947 any matching keys, you are prompted for a user ID. You can, as
948 usually, abort this prompt using ^G. When you do so, mutt will return
949 to the compose screen.
951 Once you have successfully finished the key selection, the message
952 will be encrypted using the selected public keys, and sent out.
954 Most fields of the entries in the key selection menu (see also
955 ``$pgp_entry_format'') have obvious meanings. But some explanations
956 on the capabilities, flags, and validity fields are in order.
958 The flags sequence (%f) will expand to one of the following flags:
960 R The key has been revoked and can't be used.
961 X The key is expired and can't be used.
962 d You have marked the key as disabled.
963 c There are unknown critical self-signature
966 The capabilities field (%c) expands to a two-character sequence
967 representing a key's capabilities. The first character gives the
968 key's encryption capabilities: A minus sign (
\e[1m-
\e[22m) means that the key
969 cannot be used for encryption. A dot (
\e[1m.
\e[22m) means that it's marked as a
970 signature key in one of the user IDs, but may also be used for
971 encryption. The letter
\e[1me
\e[22mindicates that this key can be used for
974 The second character indicates the key's signing capabilities. Once
975 again, a ``
\e[1m-
\e[22m'' implies ``not for signing'', ``
\e[1m.
\e[22m'' implies that the key
976 is marked as an encryption key in one of the user-ids, and ``
\e[1ms
\e[22m''
977 denotes a key which can be used for signing.
979 Finally, the validity field (%t) indicates how well-certified a user-
980 id is. A question mark (
\e[1m?
\e[22m) indicates undefined validity, a minus
981 character (
\e[1m-
\e[22m) marks an untrusted association, a space character means
982 a partially trusted association, and a plus character (
\e[1m+
\e[22m) indicates
985 \e[1m2.4.3. Sending anonymous messages via mixmaster.
\e[0m
987 You may also have configured mutt to co-operate with Mixmaster, an
988 anonymous remailer. Mixmaster permits you to send your messages
989 anonymously using a chain of remailers. Mixmaster support in mutt is
990 for mixmaster version 2.04 (beta 45 appears to be the latest) and
991 2.03. It does not support earlier versions or the later so-called
992 version 3 betas, of which the latest appears to be called 2.9b23.
994 To use it, you'll have to obey certain restrictions. Most important,
995 you cannot use the Cc and Bcc headers. To tell Mutt to use mixmaster,
996 you have to select a remailer chain, using the mix function on the
999 The chain selection screen is divided into two parts. In the (larger)
1000 upper part, you get a list of remailers you may use. In the lower
1001 part, you see the currently selected chain of remailers.
1003 You can navigate in the chain using the chain-prev and chain-next
1004 functions, which are by default bound to the left and right arrows and
1005 to the h and l keys (think vi keyboard bindings). To insert a
1006 remailer at the current chain position, use the insert function. To
1007 append a remailer behind the current chain position, use select-entry
1008 or append. You can also delete entries from the chain, using the
1009 corresponding function. Finally, to abandon your changes, leave the
1010 menu, or accept them pressing (by default) the Return key.
1012 Note that different remailers do have different capabilities,
1013 indicated in the %c entry of the remailer menu lines (see
1014 ``$mix_entry_format''). Most important is the ``middleman''
1015 capability, indicated by a capital ``M'': This means that the remailer
1016 in question cannot be used as the final element of a chain, but will
1017 only forward messages to other mixmaster remailers. For details on
1018 the other capabilities, please have a look at the mixmaster
1021 \e[1m2.5. Forwarding and Bouncing Mail
\e[0m
1023 Bouncing and forwarding let you send an existing message to recipients
1024 that you specify. Bouncing a message uses the ``sendmail'' command to
1025 send a copy to alternative addresses as if they were the message's
1026 original recipients. Forwarding a message, on the other hand, allows
1027 you to modify the message before it is resent (for example, by adding
1029 The following keys are bound by default:
1031 f forward forward message
1032 b bounce bounce (remail) message
1034 Forwarding can be done by including the original message in the new
1035 message's body (surrounded by indicating lines) or including it as a
1036 MIME attachment, depending on the value of the ``$mime_forward''
1037 variable. Decoding of attachments, like in the pager, can be
1038 controlled by the ``$forward_decode'' and ``$mime_forward_decode''
1039 variables, respectively. The desired forwarding format may depend on
1040 the content, therefore
\e[4m$mime_forward
\e[24m is a quadoption which, for
1041 example, can be set to ``ask-no''.
1043 The inclusion of headers is controlled by the current setting of the
1044 ``$weed'' variable, unless ``mime_forward'' is set.
1046 Editing the message to forward follows the same procedure as sending
1047 or replying to a message does.
1049 2
\b2.
\b.6
\b6.
\b. P
\bPo
\bos
\bst
\btp
\bpo
\bon
\bni
\bin
\bng
\bg M
\bMa
\bai
\bil
\bl
1051 At times it is desirable to delay sending a message that you have
1052 already begun to compose. When the _
\bp_
\bo_
\bs_
\bt_
\bp_
\bo_
\bn_
\be_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bs_
\bs_
\ba_
\bg_
\be function is used
1053 in the _
\bc_
\bo_
\bm_
\bp_
\bo_
\bs_
\be menu, the body of your message and attachments are
1054 stored in the mailbox specified by the ``$postponed'' variable. This
1055 means that you can recall the message even if you exit Mutt and then
1056 restart it at a later time.
1058 Once a message is postponed, there are several ways to resume it.
1059 From the command line you can use the ``-p'' option, or if you _
\bc_
\bo_
\bm_
\bp_
\bo_
\bs_
\be
1060 a new message from the _
\bi_
\bn_
\bd_
\be_
\bx or _
\bp_
\ba_
\bg_
\be_
\br you will be prompted if
1061 postponed messages exist. If multiple messages are currently
1062 postponed, the _
\bp_
\bo_
\bs_
\bt_
\bp_
\bo_
\bn_
\be_
\bd menu will pop up and you can select which
1063 message you would like to resume.
1065 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: If you postpone a reply to a message, the reply setting of the
1066 message is only updated when you actually finish the message and send
1067 it. Also, you must be in the same folder with the message you replied
1068 to for the status of the message to be updated.
1070 See also the ``$postpone'' quad-option.
1072 2
\b2.
\b.7
\b7.
\b. R
\bRe
\bea
\bad
\bdi
\bin
\bng
\bg n
\bne
\bew
\bws
\bs v
\bvi
\bia
\ba N
\bNN
\bNT
\bTP
\bP
1074 If compiled with ``--enable-nntp'' option, Mutt can read news from
1075 newsserver via NNTP. You can open a newsgroup with function ``change-
1076 newsgroup'' (default: i). Default newsserver can be obtained from
1077 _
\bN_
\bN_
\bT_
\bP_
\bS_
\bE_
\bR_
\bV_
\bE_
\bR environment variable. Like other news readers, info about
1078 subscribed newsgroups is saved in file by ``$newsrc'' variable.
1079 Article headers are cached and can be loaded from file when newsgroup
1080 entered instead loading from newsserver.
1082 3
\b3.
\b. C
\bCo
\bon
\bnf
\bfi
\big
\bgu
\bur
\bra
\bat
\bti
\bio
\bon
\bn
1084 While the default configuration (or ``preferences'') make Mutt usable
1085 right out of the box, it is often desirable to tailor Mutt to suit
1086 your own tastes. When Mutt is first invoked, it will attempt to read
1087 the ``system'' configuration file (defaults set by your local system
1088 administrator), unless the ``-n'' ``command line'' option is
1089 specified. This file is typically /usr/local/share/mutt/Muttrc or
1090 /etc/Muttrc. Mutt will next look for a file named .muttrc in your home
1091 directory. If this file does not exist and your home directory has a
1092 subdirectory named .mutt, mutt try to load a file named .mutt/muttrc.
1094 .muttrc is the file where you will usually place your ``commands'' to
1096 In addition, mutt supports version specific configuration files that
1097 are parsed instead of the default files as explained above. For
1098 instance, if your system has a Muttrc-0.88 file in the system
1099 configuration directory, and you are running version 0.88 of mutt,
1100 this file will be sourced instead of the Muttrc file. The same is
1101 true of the user configuration file, if you have a file .muttrc-0.88.6
1102 in your home directory, when you run mutt version 0.88.6, it will
1103 source this file instead of the default .muttrc file. The version
1104 number is the same which is visible using the ``-v'' ``command line''
1105 switch or using the show-version key (default: V) from the index menu.
1107 \e[1m3.1. Syntax of Initialization Files
\e[0m
1109 An initialization file consists of a series of ``commands''. Each
1110 line of the file may contain one or more commands. When multiple
1111 commands are used, they must be separated by a semicolon (;).
1113 set realname='Mutt user' ; ignore x-
1115 The hash mark, or pound sign (``#''), is used as a ``comment'' charac
1116 ter. You can use it to annotate your initialization file. All text
1117 after the comment character to the end of the line is ignored. For
1120 my_hdr X-Disclaimer: Why are you listening to me? # This is a comment
1122 Single quotes (') and double quotes (") can be used to quote strings
1123 which contain spaces or other special characters. The difference
1124 between the two types of quotes is similar to that of many popular
1125 shell programs, namely that a single quote is used to specify a
1126 literal string (one that is not interpreted for shell variables or
1127 quoting with a backslash [see next paragraph]), while double quotes
1128 indicate a string for which should be evaluated. For example,
1129 backtics are evaluated inside of double quotes, but
\e[1mnot
\e[22mfor single
1132 \ quotes the next character, just as in shells such as bash and zsh.
1133 For example, if want to put quotes ``"'' inside of a string, you can
1134 use ``\'' to force the next character to be a literal instead of
1135 interpreted character.
1137 set realname="Michael \"MuttDude\" Elkins"
1139 ``\\'' means to insert a literal ``\'' into the line. ``\n'' and
1140 ``\r'' have their usual C meanings of linefeed and carriage-return,
1143 A \ at the end of a line can be used to split commands over multiple
1144 lines, provided that the split points don't appear in the middle of
1147 It is also possible to substitute the output of a Unix command in an
1148 initialization file. This is accomplished by enclosing the command in
1149 backquotes (``). For example,
1151 my_hdr X-Operating-System: `uname -a`
1153 The output of the Unix command ``uname -a'' will be substituted before
1154 the line is parsed. Note that since initialization files are line
1155 oriented, only the first line of output from the Unix command will be
1158 UNIX environments can be accessed like the way it is done in shells
1159 like sh and bash: Prepend the name of the environment by a ``$''. For
1162 set record=+sent_on_$HOSTNAME
1164 The commands understood by mutt are explained in the next paragraphs.
1165 For a complete list, see the ``command reference''.
1167 \e[1m3.2. Defining/Using aliases
\e[0m
1169 Usage: alias
\e[4mkey
\e[24m
\e[4maddress
\e[24m [ ,
\e[4maddress
\e[24m, ... ]
1171 It's usually very cumbersome to remember or type out the address of
1172 someone you are communicating with. Mutt allows you to create
1173 ``aliases'' which map a short string to a full address.
1175 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mif you want to create an alias for a group (by specifying more
1176 than one address), you
\e[1mmust
\e[22mseparate the addresses with a comma
1179 To remove an alias or aliases (``*'' means all aliases):
1181 unalias [ * |
\e[4mkey
\e[24m
\e[4m...
\e[24m ]
1183 alias muttdude me@cs.hmc.edu (Michael Elkins)
1184 alias theguys manny, moe, jack
1186 Unlike other mailers, Mutt doesn't require aliases to be defined in a
1187 special file. The alias command can appear anywhere in a
1188 configuration file, as long as this file is ``sourced''.
1189 Consequently, you can have multiple alias files, or you can have all
1190 aliases defined in your muttrc.
1192 On the other hand, the ``create-alias'' function can use only one
1193 file, the one pointed to by the ``$alias_file'' variable (which is
1194 ~/.muttrc by default). This file is not special either, in the sense
1195 that Mutt will happily append aliases to any file, but in order for
1196 the new aliases to take effect you need to explicitly ``source'' this
1200 source /usr/local/share/Mutt.aliases
1201 source ~/.mail_aliases
1202 set alias_file=~/.mail_aliases
1204 To use aliases, you merely use the alias at any place in mutt where
1205 mutt prompts for addresses, such as the
\e[4mTo:
\e[24m or
\e[4mCc:
\e[24m prompt. You can
1206 also enter aliases in your editor at the appropriate headers if you
1207 have the ``$edit_headers'' variable set.
1209 In addition, at the various address prompts, you can use the tab
1210 character to expand a partial alias to the full alias. If there are
1211 multiple matches, mutt will bring up a menu with the matching aliases.
1212 In order to be presented with the full list of aliases, you must hit
1213 tab with out a partial alias, such as at the beginning of the prompt
1214 or after a comma denoting multiple addresses.
1216 In the alias menu, you can select as many aliases as you want with the
1217 \e[4mselect-entry
\e[24m key (default: RET), and use the
\e[4mexit
\e[24m key (default: q) to
1218 return to the address prompt.
1220 \e[1m3.3. Changing the default key bindings
\e[0m
1222 Usage: bind
\e[4mmap
\e[24m
\e[4mkey
\e[24m
\e[4mfunction
\e[0m
1224 This command allows you to change the default key bindings (operation
1225 invoked when pressing a key).
1227 \e[4mmap
\e[24m specifies in which menu the binding belongs. Multiple maps may be
1228 specified by separating them with commas (no additional whitespace is
1229 allowed). The currently defined maps are:
1232 This is not a real menu, but is used as a fallback for all of
1233 the other menus except for the pager and editor modes. If a key
1234 is not defined in another menu, Mutt will look for a binding to
1235 use in this menu. This allows you to bind a key to a certain
1236 function in multiple menus instead of having multiple bind
1237 statements to accomplish the same task.
1240 The alias menu is the list of your personal aliases as defined
1241 in your muttrc. It is the mapping from a short alias name to
1242 the full email address(es) of the recipient(s).
1245 The attachment menu is used to access the attachments on
1249 The browser is used for both browsing the local directory
1250 structure, and for listing all of your incoming mailboxes.
1253 The editor is the line-based editor the user enters text data.
1256 The index is the list of messages contained in a mailbox.
1259 The compose menu is the screen used when sending a new message.
1262 The pager is the mode used to display message/attachment data,
1266 The pgp menu is used to select the OpenPGP keys used for
1267 encrypting outgoing messages.
1270 The postpone menu is similar to the index menu, except is used
1271 when recalling a message the user was composing, but saved until
1274 \e[4mkey
\e[24m is the key (or key sequence) you wish to bind. To specify a
1275 control character, use the sequence
\e[4m\Cx
\e[24m, where
\e[4mx
\e[24m is the letter of the
1276 control character (for example, to specify control-A use ``\Ca'').
1277 Note that the case of
\e[4mx
\e[24m as well as
\e[4m\C
\e[24m is ignored, so that
\e[4m\CA
\e[24m,
\e[4m\Ca
\e[24m,
1278 \e[4m\cA
\e[24m and
\e[4m\ca
\e[24m are all equivalent. An alternative form is to specify the
1279 key as a three digit octal number prefixed with a ``\'' (for example
1280 \e[4m\177
\e[24m is equivalent to
\e[4m\c?
\e[24m).
1282 In addition,
\e[4mkey
\e[24m may consist of:
1295 <pagedown> Page Down
1296 <backspace> Backspace
1305 <f10> function key 10
1307 \e[4mkey
\e[24m does not need to be enclosed in quotes unless it contains a space
1310 \e[4mfunction
\e[24m specifies which action to take when
\e[4mkey
\e[24m is pressed. For a
1311 complete list of functions, see the ``reference''. The special
1312 function noop unbinds the specified key sequence.
1314 \e[1m3.4. Defining aliases for character sets
\e[0m
1316 Usage: charset-hook
\e[4malias
\e[24m
\e[4mcharset
\e[0m
1317 Usage: iconv-hook
\e[4mcharset
\e[24m
\e[4mlocal-charset
\e[0m
1319 The charset-hook command defines an alias for a character set. This
1320 is useful to properly display messages which are tagged with a
1321 character set name not known to mutt.
1323 The iconv-hook command defines a system-specific name for a character
1324 set. This is helpful when your systems character conversion library
1325 insists on using strange, system-specific names for character sets.
1327 \e[1m3.5. Setting variables based upon mailbox
\e[0m
1329 Usage: folder-hook [!]
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
1331 It is often desirable to change settings based on which mailbox you
1332 are reading. The folder-hook command provides a method by which you
1333 can execute any configuration command.
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m is a regular expression
1334 specifying in which mailboxes to execute
\e[4mcommand
\e[24m before loading. If a
1335 mailbox matches multiple folder-hook's, they are executed in the order
1336 given in the muttrc.
1338 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mif you use the ``!'' shortcut for ``$spoolfile'' at the
1339 beginning of the pattern, you must place it inside of double or single
1340 quotes in order to distinguish it from the logical
\e[4mnot
\e[24m operator for
1343 Note that the settings are
\e[4mnot
\e[24m restored when you leave the mailbox.
1344 For example, a command action to perform is to change the sorting
1345 method based upon the mailbox being read:
1347 folder-hook mutt set sort=threads
1349 However, the sorting method is not restored to its previous value when
1350 reading a different mailbox. To specify a
\e[4mdefault
\e[24m command, use the
1353 folder-hook . set sort=date-sent
1355 \e[1m3.6. Keyboard macros
\e[0m
1357 Usage: macro
\e[4mmenu
\e[24m
\e[4mkey
\e[24m
\e[4msequence
\e[24m [
\e[4mdescription
\e[24m ]
1359 Macros are useful when you would like a single key to perform a series
1360 of actions. When you press
\e[4mkey
\e[24m in menu
\e[4mmenu
\e[24m, Mutt will behave as if
1361 you had typed
\e[4msequence
\e[24m. So if you have a common sequence of commands
1362 you type, you can create a macro to execute those commands with a
1365 \e[4mmenu
\e[24m is the ``map'' which the macro will be bound. Multiple maps may
1366 be specified by separating multiple menu arguments by commas.
1367 Whitespace may not be used in between the menu arguments and the
1368 commas separating them.
1370 \e[4mkey
\e[24m and
\e[4msequence
\e[24m are expanded by the same rules as the ``key
1371 bindings''. There are some additions however. The first is that
1372 control characters in
\e[4msequence
\e[24m can also be specified as
\e[4m^x
\e[24m. In order
1373 to get a caret (`^'') you need to use
\e[4m^^
\e[24m. Secondly, to specify a
1374 certain key such as
\e[4mup
\e[24m or to invoke a function directly, you can use
1375 the format
\e[4m<key
\e[24m
\e[4mname>
\e[24m and
\e[4m<function
\e[24m
\e[4mname>
\e[24m. For a listing of key names
1376 see the section on ``key bindings''. Functions are listed in the
1377 ``function reference''.
1379 The advantage with using function names directly is that the macros
1380 will work regardless of the current key bindings, so they are not
1381 dependent on the user having particular key definitions. This makes
1382 them more robust and portable, and also facilitates defining of macros
1383 in files used by more than one user (eg. the system Muttrc).
1385 Optionally you can specify a descriptive text after
\e[4msequence
\e[24m, which is
1386 shown in the help screens.
1388 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mMacro definitions (if any) listed in the help screen(s), are
1389 silently truncated at the screen width, and are not wrapped.
1391 \e[1m3.7. Using color and mono video attributes
\e[0m
1393 Usage: color
\e[4mobject
\e[24m
\e[4mforeground
\e[24m
\e[4mbackground
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ]
1394 Usage: color index
\e[4mforeground
\e[24m
\e[4mbackground
\e[24m
\e[4mpattern
\e[0m
1395 Usage: uncolor index
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
1397 If your terminal supports color, you can spice up Mutt by creating
1398 your own color scheme. To define the color of an object (type of
1399 information), you must specify both a foreground color
\e[1mand
\e[22ma
1400 background color (it is not possible to only specify one or the
1403 \e[4mobject
\e[24m can be one of:
1407 · body (match
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m in the body of messages)
1409 · bold (hiliting bold patterns in the body of messages)
1411 · error (error messages printed by Mutt)
1413 · header (match
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m in the message header)
1415 · hdrdefault (default color of the message header in the pager)
1417 · index (match
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m in the message index)
1419 · indicator (arrow or bar used to indicate the current item in a
1422 · markers (the ``+'' markers at the beginning of wrapped lines in the
1425 · message (informational messages)
1429 · quoted (text matching ``$quote_regexp'' in the body of a message)
1431 · quoted1, quoted2, ..., quoted
\e[1mN
\e[22m(higher levels of quoting)
1433 · search (hiliting of words in the pager)
1437 · status (mode lines used to display info about the mailbox or
1440 · tilde (the ``~'' used to pad blank lines in the pager)
1442 · tree (thread tree drawn in the message index and attachment menu)
1444 · underline (hiliting underlined patterns in the body of messages)
1446 \e[4mforeground
\e[24m and
\e[4mbackground
\e[24m can be one of the following:
1468 \e[4mforeground
\e[24m can optionally be prefixed with the keyword bright to make
1469 the foreground color boldfaced (e.g., brightred).
1471 If your terminal supports it, the special keyword
\e[4mdefault
\e[24m can be used
1472 as a transparent color. The value
\e[4mbrightdefault
\e[24m is also valid. If
1473 Mutt is linked against the
\e[4mS-Lang
\e[24m library, you also need to set the
1474 \e[4mCOLORFGBG
\e[24m environment variable to the default colors of your terminal
1475 for this to work; for example (for Bourne-like shells):
1477 set COLORFGBG="green;black"
1480 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mThe
\e[4mS-Lang
\e[24m library requires you to use the
\e[4mlightgray
\e[24m and
\e[4mbrown
\e[0m
1481 keywords instead of
\e[4mwhite
\e[24m and
\e[4myellow
\e[24m when setting this variable.
1483 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mThe uncolor command can be applied to the index object only. It
1484 removes entries from the list. You
\e[1mmust
\e[22mspecify the same pattern
1485 specified in the color command for it to be removed. The pattern
1486 ``*'' is a special token which means to clear the color index list of
1489 Mutt also recognizes the keywords
\e[4mcolor0
\e[24m,
\e[4mcolor1
\e[24m, ...,
\e[4mcolor
\e[24m
\e[1mN-1
\e[22m(
\e[1mN
\e[0m
1490 being the number of colors supported by your terminal). This is
1491 useful when you remap the colors for your display (for example by
1492 changing the color associated with
\e[4mcolor2
\e[24m for your xterm), since color
1493 names may then lose their normal meaning.
1495 If your terminal does not support color, it is still possible change
1496 the video attributes through the use of the ``mono'' command:
1498 Usage: mono
\e[4m<object>
\e[24m
\e[4m<attribute>
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ]
1499 Usage: mono index
\e[4mattribute
\e[24m
\e[4mpattern
\e[0m
1500 Usage: unmono index
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
1502 where
\e[4mattribute
\e[24m is one of the following:
1514 \e[1m3.8. Ignoring (weeding) unwanted message headers
\e[0m
1516 Usage: [un]ignore
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
1518 Messages often have many header fields added by automatic processing
1519 systems, or which may not seem useful to display on the screen. This
1520 command allows you to specify header fields which you don't normally
1523 You do not need to specify the full header field name. For example,
1524 ``ignore content-'' will ignore all header fields that begin with the
1525 pattern ``content-''. ``ignore *'' will ignore all headers.
1527 To remove a previously added token from the list, use the ``unignore''
1528 command. The ``unignore'' command will make Mutt display headers with
1529 the given pattern. For example, if you do ``ignore x-'' it is
1530 possible to ``unignore x-mailer''.
1532 ``unignore *'' will remove all tokens from the ignore list.
1536 # Sven's draconian header weeding
1538 unignore from date subject to cc
1539 unignore organization organisation x-mailer: x-newsreader: x-mailing-list:
1542 \e[1m3.9. Alternative addresses
\e[0m
1544 Usage: [un]alternates
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
1546 With various functions, mutt will treat messages differently,
1547 depending on whether you sent them or whether you received them from
1548 someone else. For instance, when replying to a message that you sent
1549 to a different party, mutt will automatically suggest to send the
1550 response to the original message's recipients -- responding to
1551 yourself won't make much sense in many cases. (See ``$reply_to''.)
1553 Many users receive e-mail under a number of different addresses. To
1554 fully use mutt's features here, the program must be able to recognize
1555 what e-mail addresses you receive mail under. That's the purpose of
1556 the alternates command: It takes a list of regular expressions, each
1557 of which can identify an address under which you receive e-mail.
1559 The unalternates command can be used to write exceptions to alternates
1560 patterns. If an address matches something in an alternates command,
1561 but you nonetheless do not think it is from you, you can list a more
1562 precise pattern under an unalternates command.
1564 To remove a regular expression from the alternates list, use the
1565 unalternates command with exactly the same
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m. Likewise, if the
1566 \e[4mregexp
\e[24m for a alternates command matches an entry on the unalternates
1567 list, that unalternates entry will be removed. If the
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m for
1568 unalternates is ``*'',
\e[4mall
\e[24m
\e[4mentries
\e[24m on alternates will be removed.
1570 \e[1m3.10. Mailing lists
\e[0m
1572 Usage: [un]lists
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
1573 Usage: [un]subscribe
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
1575 Mutt has a few nice features for ``handling mailing lists''. In order
1576 to take advantage of them, you must specify which addresses belong to
1577 mailing lists, and which mailing lists you are subscribed to. Once
1578 you have done this, the ``list-reply'' function will work for all
1579 known lists. Additionally, when you send a message to a subscribed
1580 list, mutt will add a Mail-Followup-To header to tell other users'
1581 mail user agents not to send copies of replies to your personal
1582 address. Note that the Mail-Followup-To header is a non-standard
1583 extension which is not supported by all mail user agents. Adding it
1584 is not bullet-proof against receiving personal CCs of list messages.
1585 Also note that the generation of the Mail-Followup-To header is
1586 controlled by the ``$followup_to'' configuration variable.
1588 More precisely, Mutt maintains lists of patterns for the addresses of
1589 known and subscribed mailing lists. Every subscribed mailing list is
1590 known. To mark a mailing list as known, use the ``lists'' command. To
1591 mark it as subscribed, use ``subscribe''.
1593 You can use regular expressions with both commands. To mark all
1594 messages sent to a specific bug report's address on mutt's bug
1595 tracking system as list mail, for instance, you could say ``subscribe
1596 [0-9]*@bugs.guug.de''. Often, it's sufficient to just give a portion
1597 of the list's e-mail address.
1599 Specify as much of the address as you need to to remove ambiguity.
1600 For example, if you've subscribed to the Mutt mailing list, you will
1601 receive mail addresssed to
\e[4mmutt-users@mutt.org
\e[24m. So, to tell Mutt that
1602 this is a mailing list, you could add ``lists mutt-users'' to your
1603 initialization file. To tell mutt that you are subscribed to it, add
1604 ``subscribe mutt-users'' to your initialization file instead. If you
1605 also happen to get mail from someone whose address is
\e[4mmutt-
\e[0m
1606 \e[4musers@example.com
\e[24m, you could use ``lists mutt-users@mutt\\.org'' or
1607 ``subscribe mutt-users@mutt\\.org'' to match only mail from the actual
1610 The ``unlists'' command is used to remove a token from the list of
1611 known and subscribed mailing-lists. Use ``unlists *'' to remove all
1613 To remove a mailing list from the list of subscribed mailing lists,
1614 but keep it on the list of known mailing lists, use ``unsubscribe''.
1616 \e[1m3.11. Using Multiple spool mailboxes
\e[0m
1618 Usage: mbox-hook [!]
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mmailbox
\e[0m
1620 This command is used to move read messages from a specified mailbox to
1621 a different mailbox automatically when you quit or change folders.
1622 \e[4mpattern
\e[24m is a regular expression specifying the mailbox to treat as a
1623 ``spool'' mailbox and
\e[4mmailbox
\e[24m specifies where mail should be saved
1626 Unlike some of the other
\e[4mhook
\e[24m commands, only the
\e[4mfirst
\e[24m matching
1627 pattern is used (it is not possible to save read mail in more than a
1630 \e[1m3.12. Defining mailboxes which receive mail
\e[0m
1632 Usage: [un]mailboxes [!]
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m [
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m ... ]
1634 This command specifies folders which can receive mail and which will
1635 be checked for new messages. By default, the main menu status bar
1636 displays how many of these folders have new messages.
1638 When changing folders, pressing
\e[4mspace
\e[24m will cycle through folders with
1641 Pressing TAB in the directory browser will bring up a menu showing the
1642 files specified by the mailboxes command, and indicate which contain
1643 new messages. Mutt will automatically enter this mode when invoked
1644 from the command line with the -y option.
1646 The ``unmailboxes'' command is used to remove a token from the list of
1647 folders which receive mail. Use ``unmailboxes *'' to remove all
1650 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mnew mail is detected by comparing the last modification time to
1651 the last access time. Utilities like biff or frm or any other program
1652 which accesses the mailbox might cause Mutt to never detect new mail
1653 for that mailbox if they do not properly reset the access time.
1654 Backup tools are another common reason for updated access times.
1656 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mthe filenames in the mailboxes command are resolved when the
1657 command is executed, so if these names contain ``shortcut characters''
1658 (such as ``='' and ``!''), any variable definition that affect these
1659 characters (like ``$folder'' and ``$spoolfile'') should be executed
1660 before the mailboxes command.
1662 \e[1m3.13. User defined headers
\e[0m
1665 my_hdr
\e[4mstring
\e[0m
1666 unmy_hdr
\e[4mfield
\e[24m [
\e[4mfield
\e[24m ... ]
1668 The ``my_hdr'' command allows you to create your own header fields
1669 which will be added to every message you send.
1671 For example, if you would like to add an ``Organization:'' header
1672 field to all of your outgoing messages, you can put the command
1674 my_hdr Organization: A Really Big Company, Anytown, USA
1678 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mspace characters are
\e[4mnot
\e[24m allowed between the keyword and the
1679 colon (``:''). The standard for electronic mail (RFC822) says that
1680 space is illegal there, so Mutt enforces the rule.
1682 If you would like to add a header field to a single message, you
1683 should either set the ``edit_headers'' variable, or use the
\e[4medit-
\e[0m
1684 \e[4mheaders
\e[24m function (default: ``E'') in the send-menu so that you can
1685 edit the header of your message along with the body.
1687 To remove user defined header fields, use the ``unmy_hdr'' command.
1688 You may specify an asterisk (``*'') to remove all header fields, or
1689 the fields to remove. For example, to remove all ``To'' and ``Cc''
1690 header fields, you could use:
1694 \e[1m3.14. Defining the order of headers when viewing messages
\e[0m
1696 Usage: hdr_order
\e[4mheader1
\e[24m
\e[4mheader2
\e[24m
\e[4mheader3
\e[0m
1698 With this command, you can specify an order in which mutt will attempt
1699 to present headers to you when viewing messages.
1701 ``unhdr_order *'' will clear all previous headers from the order list,
1702 thus removing the header order effects set by the system-wide startup
1705 hdr_order From Date: From: To: Cc: Subject:
1707 \e[1m3.15. Specify default save filename
\e[0m
1709 Usage: save-hook [!]
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mfilename
\e[0m
1711 This command is used to override the default filename used when saving
1712 messages.
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m will be used as the default filename if the
1713 message is
\e[4mFrom:
\e[24m an address matching
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m or if you are the author
1714 and the message is addressed
\e[4mto:
\e[24m something matching
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m.
1716 See ``Message Matching in Hooks'' for information on the exact format
1717 of
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m.
1721 save-hook me@(turing\\.)?cs\\.hmc\\.edu$ +elkins
1722 save-hook aol\\.com$ +spam
1724 Also see the ``fcc-save-hook'' command.
1726 \e[1m3.16. Specify default Fcc: mailbox when composing
\e[0m
1728 Usage: fcc-hook [!]
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mmailbox
\e[0m
1730 This command is used to save outgoing mail in a mailbox other than
1731 ``$record''. Mutt searches the initial list of message recipients for
1732 the first matching
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m and uses
\e[4mmailbox
\e[24m as the default Fcc:
1733 mailbox. If no match is found the message will be saved to
1734 ``$record'' mailbox.
1736 See ``Message Matching in Hooks'' for information on the exact format
1737 of
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m.
1739 Example: fcc-hook [@.]aol\\.com$ +spammers
1741 The above will save a copy of all messages going to the aol.com domain
1742 to the `+spammers' mailbox by default. Also see the ``fcc-save-hook''
1745 \e[1m3.17. Specify default save filename and default Fcc: mailbox at once
\e[0m
1747 Usage: fcc-save-hook [!]
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mmailbox
\e[0m
1749 This command is a shortcut, equivalent to doing both a ``fcc-hook''
1750 and a ``save-hook'' with its arguments.
1752 \e[1m3.18. Change settings based upon message recipients
\e[0m
1754 Usage: reply-hook [!]
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
1755 Usage: send-hook [!]
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
1756 Usage: send2-hook [!]
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
1758 These commands can be used to execute arbitrary configuration commands
1759 based upon recipients of the message.
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m is a regular expression
1760 matching the desired address.
\e[4mcommand
\e[24m is executed when
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m matches
1761 recipients of the message.
1763 reply-hook is matched against the message you are
\e[4mreplying
\e[24m
\e[1mto
\e[22m, instead
1764 of the message you are
\e[4msending
\e[24m. send-hook is matched against all
1765 messages, both
\e[4mnew
\e[24m and
\e[4mreplies
\e[24m.
\e[1mNote:
\e[22mreply-hooks are matched
\e[1mbefore
\e[0m
1766 the send-hook,
\e[1mregardless
\e[22mof the order specified in the users's
1769 send2-hook is matched every time a message is changed, either by
1770 editing it, or by using the compose menu to change its recipients or
1771 subject. send2-hook is executed after send-hook, and can, e.g., be
1772 used to set parameters such as the ``$sendmail'' variable depending on
1773 the message's sender address.
1775 For each type of send-hook or reply-hook, when multiple matches occur,
1776 commands are executed in the order they are specified in the muttrc
1777 (for that type of hook).
1779 See ``Message Matching in Hooks'' for information on the exact format
1780 of
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m.
1782 Example: send-hook mutt "set mime_forward signature=''"
1784 Another typical use for this command is to change the values of the
1785 ``$attribution'', ``$signature'' and ``$locale'' variables in order to
1786 change the language of the attributions and signatures based upon the
1789 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mthe send-hook's are only executed ONCE after getting the initial
1790 list of recipients. Adding a recipient after replying or editing the
1791 message will NOT cause any send-hook to be executed. Also note that
1792 my_hdr commands which modify recipient headers, or the message's
1793 subject, don't have any effect on the current message when executed
1796 \e[1m3.19. Change settings before formatting a message
\e[0m
1798 Usage: message-hook [!]
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
1800 This command can be used to execute arbitrary configuration commands
1801 before viewing or formatting a message based upon information about
1802 the message.
\e[4mcommand
\e[24m is executed if the
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m matches the message
1803 to be displayed. When multiple matches occur, commands are executed in
1804 the order they are specified in the muttrc.
1806 See ``Message Matching in Hooks'' for information on the exact format
1807 of
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m.
1811 message-hook ~A 'set pager=builtin'
1812 message-hook '~f freshmeat-news' 'set pager="less \"+/^ subject: .*\""'
1814 \e[1m3.20. Choosing the cryptographic key of the recipient
\e[0m
1816 Usage: crypt-hook
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mkeyid
\e[0m
1818 When encrypting messages with PGP or OpenSSL, you may want to
1819 associate a certain key with a given e-mail address automatically,
1820 either because the recipient's public key can't be deduced from the
1821 destination address, or because, for some reasons, you need to
1822 override the key Mutt would normally use. The crypt-hook command
1823 provides a method by which you can specify the ID of the public key to
1824 be used when encrypting messages to a certain recipient.
1826 The meaning of "key id" is to be taken broadly in this context: You
1827 can either put a numerical key ID here, an e-mail address, or even
1830 \e[1m3.21. Adding key sequences to the keyboard buffer
\e[0m
1832 Usage: push
\e[4mstring
\e[0m
1834 This command adds the named string to the keyboard buffer. The string
1835 may contain control characters, key names and function names like the
1836 sequence string in the ``macro'' command. You may use it to
1837 automatically run a sequence of commands at startup, or when entering
1840 \e[1m3.22. Executing functions
\e[0m
1842 Usage: exec
\e[4mfunction
\e[24m [
\e[4mfunction
\e[24m ... ]
1844 This command can be used to execute any function. Functions are listed
1845 in the ``function reference''. ``exec function'' is equivalent to
1846 ``push <function>''.
1848 \e[1m3.23. Message Scoring
\e[0m
1850 Usage: score
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mvalue
\e[0m
1851 Usage: unscore
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
1853 The score commands adds
\e[4mvalue
\e[24m to a message's score if
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m matches
1854 it.
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m is a string in the format described in the ``patterns''
1855 section (note: For efficiency reasons, patterns which scan information
1856 not available in the index, such as ~b, ~B or ~h, may not be used).
1857 \e[4mvalue
\e[24m is a positive or negative integer. A message's final score is
1858 the sum total of all matching score entries. However, you may
1859 optionally prefix
\e[4mvalue
\e[24m with an equal sign (=) to cause evaluation to
1860 stop at a particular entry if there is a match. Negative final scores
1861 are rounded up to 0.
1863 The unscore command removes score entries from the list. You
\e[1mmust
\e[0m
1864 specify the same pattern specified in the score command for it to be
1865 removed. The pattern ``*'' is a special token which means to clear
1866 the list of all score entries.
1868 \e[1m3.24. Spam detection
\e[0m
1870 Usage: spam
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mformat
\e[0m
1871 Usage: nospam
\e[4mpattern
\e[0m
1873 Mutt has generalized support for external spam-scoring filters. By
1874 defining your spam patterns with the spam and nospam commands, you can
1875 \e[4mlimit
\e[24m,
\e[4msearch
\e[24m, and
\e[4msort
\e[24m your mail based on its spam attributes, as
1876 determined by the external filter. You also can display the spam
1877 attributes in your index display using the %H selector in the
1878 ``$index_format'' variable. (Tip: try %?H?[%H] ? to display spam tags
1879 only when they are defined for a given message.)
1881 Your first step is to define your external filter's spam patterns
1882 using the spam command.
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m should be a regular expression that
1883 matches a header in a mail message. If any message in the mailbox
1884 matches this regular expression, it will receive a ``spam tag'' or
1885 ``spam attribute'' (unless it also matches a nospam pattern -- see
1886 below.) The appearance of this attribute is entirely up to you, and is
1887 governed by the
\e[4mformat
\e[24m parameter.
\e[4mformat
\e[24m can be any static text, but
1888 it also can include back-references from the
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m expression. (A
1889 regular expression ``back-reference'' refers to a sub-expression
1890 contained within parentheses.) %1 is replaced with the first back-
1891 reference in the regex, %2 with the second, etc.
1893 If you're using multiple spam filters, a message can have more than
1894 one spam-related header. You can define spam patterns for each filter
1895 you use. If a message matches two or more of these patterns, and the
1896 $spam_separator variable is set to a string, then the message's spam
1897 tag will consist of all the
\e[4mformat
\e[24m strings joined together, with the
1898 value of $spam_separator separating them.
1900 For example, suppose I use DCC, SpamAssassin, and PureMessage. I might
1901 define these spam settings:
1903 spam "X-DCC-.*-Metrics:.*(....)=many" "90+/DCC-%1"
1904 spam "X-Spam-Status: Yes" "90+/SA"
1905 spam "X-PerlMX-Spam: .*Probability=([0-9]+)%" "%1/PM"
1906 set spam_separator=", "
1908 If I then received a message that DCC registered with ``many'' hits
1909 under the ``Fuz2'' checksum, and that PureMessage registered with a
1910 97% probability of being spam, that message's spam tag would read
1911 90+/DCC-Fuz2, 97/PM. (The four characters before ``=many'' in a DCC
1912 report indicate the checksum used -- in this case, ``Fuz2''.)
1914 If the $spam_separator variable is unset, then each spam pattern match
1915 supercedes the previous one. Instead of getting joined
\e[4mformat
\e[24m strings,
1916 you'll get only the last one to match.
1918 The spam tag is what will be displayed in the index when you use %H in
1919 the $index_format variable. It's also the string that the ~H pattern-
1920 matching expression matches against for
\e[4msearch
\e[24m and
\e[4mlimit
\e[24m functions.
1921 And it's what sorting by spam attribute will use as a sort key.
1923 That's a pretty complicated example, and most people's actual
1924 environments will have only one spam filter. The simpler your
1925 configuration, the more effective mutt can be, especially when it
1928 Generally, when you sort by spam tag, mutt will sort
\e[4mlexically
\e[24m -- that
1929 is, by ordering strings alphnumerically. However, if a spam tag begins
1930 with a number, mutt will sort numerically first, and lexically only
1931 when two numbers are equal in value. (This is like UNIX's sort -n.) A
1932 message with no spam attributes at all -- that is, one that didn't
1933 match
\e[4many
\e[24m of your spam patterns -- is sorted at lowest priority.
1934 Numbers are sorted next, beginning with 0 and ranging upward. Finally,
1935 non-numeric strings are sorted, with ``a'' taking lower priority than
1936 ``z''. Clearly, in general, sorting by spam tags is most effective
1937 when you can coerce your filter to give you a raw number. But in case
1938 you can't, mutt can still do something useful.
1940 The nospam command can be used to write exceptions to spam patterns.
1941 If a header pattern matches something in a spam command, but you
1942 nonetheless do not want it to receive a spam tag, you can list a more
1943 precise pattern under a nospam command.
1945 If the
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m given to nospam is exactly the same as the
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m on
1946 an existing spam list entry, the effect will be to remove the entry
1947 from the spam list, instead of adding an exception. Likewise, if the
1948 \e[4mpattern
\e[24m for a spam command matches an entry on the nospam list, that
1949 nospam entry will be removed. If the
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m for nospam is ``*'',
\e[4mall
\e[0m
1950 \e[4mentries
\e[24m
\e[4mon
\e[24m
\e[4mboth
\e[24m
\e[4mlists
\e[24m will be removed. This might be the default
1951 action if you use spam and nospam in conjunction with a folder-hook.
1953 You can have as many spam or nospam commands as you like. You can
1954 even do your own primitive spam detection within mutt -- for example,
1955 if you consider all mail from MAILER-DAEMON to be spam, you can use a
1956 spam command like this:
1958 spam "^From: .*MAILER-DAEMON" "999"
1960 \e[1m3.25. Setting variables
\e[0m
1962 Usage: set [no|inv]
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m[=
\e[4mvalue
\e[24m] [
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m ... ]
1963 Usage: toggle
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m [
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m ... ]
1964 Usage: unset
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m [
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m ... ]
1965 Usage: reset
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m [
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m ... ]
1967 This command is used to set (and unset) ``configuration variables''.
1968 There are four basic types of variables: boolean, number, string and
1969 quadoption.
\e[4mboolean
\e[24m variables can be
\e[4mset
\e[24m (true) or
\e[4munset
\e[24m (false).
1970 \e[4mnumber
\e[24m variables can be assigned a positive integer value.
1972 \e[4mstring
\e[24m variables consist of any number of printable characters.
1973 \e[4mstrings
\e[24m must be enclosed in quotes if they contain spaces or tabs.
1974 You may also use the ``C'' escape sequences
\e[1m\n
\e[22mand
\e[1m\t
\e[22mfor newline and
1977 \e[4mquadoption
\e[24m variables are used to control whether or not to be prompted
1978 for certain actions, or to specify a default action. A value of
\e[4myes
\e[0m
1979 will cause the action to be carried out automatically as if you had
1980 answered yes to the question. Similarly, a value of
\e[4mno
\e[24m will cause the
1981 the action to be carried out as if you had answered ``no.'' A value
1982 of
\e[4mask-yes
\e[24m will cause a prompt with a default answer of ``yes'' and
1983 \e[4mask-no
\e[24m will provide a default answer of ``no.''
1985 Prefixing a variable with ``no'' will unset it. Example: set
1988 For
\e[4mboolean
\e[24m variables, you may optionally prefix the variable name
1989 with inv to toggle the value (on or off). This is useful when writing
1990 macros. Example: set invsmart_wrap.
1992 The toggle command automatically prepends the inv prefix to all
1993 specified variables.
1995 The unset command automatically prepends the no prefix to all
1996 specified variables.
1998 Using the enter-command function in the
\e[4mindex
\e[24m menu, you can query the
1999 value of a variable by prefixing the name of the variable with a
2004 The question mark is actually only required for boolean and quadoption
2007 The reset command resets all given variables to the compile time
2008 defaults (hopefully mentioned in this manual). If you use the command
2009 set and prefix the variable with ``&'' this has the same behavior as
2012 With the reset command there exists the special variable ``all'',
2013 which allows you to reset all variables to their system defaults.
2015 \e[1m3.26. Reading initialization commands from another file
\e[0m
2017 Usage: source
\e[4mfilename
\e[0m
2019 This command allows the inclusion of initialization commands from
2020 other files. For example, I place all of my aliases in
2021 ~/.mail_aliases so that I can make my ~/.muttrc readable and keep my
2024 If the filename begins with a tilde (``~''), it will be expanded to
2025 the path of your home directory.
2027 If the filename ends with a vertical bar (|), then
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m is
2028 considered to be an executable program from which to read input (eg.
2029 source ~/bin/myscript|).
2031 \e[1m3.27. Removing hooks
\e[0m
2033 Usage: unhook [ * |
\e[4mhook-type
\e[24m ]
2035 This command permits you to flush hooks you have previously defined.
2036 You can either remove all hooks by giving the ``*'' character as an
2037 argument, or you can remove all hooks of a specific type by saying
2038 something like unhook send-hook.
2040 \e[1m4. Advanced Usage
\e[0m
2042 \e[1m4.1. Regular Expressions
\e[0m
2044 All string patterns in Mutt including those in more complex
2045 ``patterns'' must be specified using regular expressions (regexp) in
2046 the ``POSIX extended'' syntax (which is more or less the syntax used
2047 by egrep and GNU awk). For your convenience, we have included below a
2048 brief description of this syntax.
2050 The search is case sensitive if the pattern contains at least one
2051 upper case letter, and case insensitive otherwise. Note that ``\''
2052 must be quoted if used for a regular expression in an initialization
2055 A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings.
2056 Regular expressions are constructed analogously to arithmetic
2057 expressions, by using various operators to combine smaller
2060 Note that the regular expression can be enclosed/delimited by either "
2061 or ' which is useful if the regular expression includes a white-space
2062 character. See ``Syntax of Initialization Files'' for more
2063 information on " and ' delimiter processing. To match a literal " or
2064 ' you must preface it with \ (backslash).
2066 The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match
2067 a single character. Most characters, including all letters and
2068 digits, are regular expressions that match themselves. Any
2069 metacharacter with special meaning may be quoted by preceding it with
2072 The period ``.'' matches any single character. The caret ``^'' and
2073 the dollar sign ``$'' are metacharacters that respectively match the
2074 empty string at the beginning and end of a line.
2076 A list of characters enclosed by ``['' and ``]'' matches any single
2077 character in that list; if the first character of the list is a caret
2078 ``^'' then it matches any character
\e[1mnot
\e[22min the list. For example, the
2079 regular expression
\e[1m[0123456789]
\e[22mmatches any single digit. A range of
2080 ASCII characters may be specified by giving the first and last
2081 characters, separated by a hyphen ``-''. Most metacharacters lose
2082 their special meaning inside lists. To include a literal ``]'' place
2083 it first in the list. Similarly, to include a literal ``^'' place it
2084 anywhere but first. Finally, to include a literal hyphen ``-'' place
2087 Certain named classes of characters are predefined. Character classes
2088 consist of ``[:'', a keyword denoting the class, and ``:]''. The
2089 following classes are defined by the POSIX standard:
2092 Alphanumeric characters.
2095 Alphabetic characters.
2098 Space or tab characters.
2107 Characters that are both printable and visible. (A space is
2108 printable, but not visible, while an ``a'' is both.)
2111 Lower-case alphabetic characters.
2114 Printable characters (characters that are not control
2118 Punctuation characters (characters that are not letter, digits,
2119 control characters, or space characters).
2122 Space characters (such as space, tab and formfeed, to name a
2126 Upper-case alphabetic characters.
2128 \e[1m[:xdigit:]
\e[0m
2129 Characters that are hexadecimal digits.
2131 A character class is only valid in a regular expression inside the
2132 brackets of a character list. Note that the brackets in these class
2133 names are part of the symbolic names, and must be included in addition
2134 to the brackets delimiting the bracket list. For example,
\e[1m[[:digit:]]
\e[0m
2135 is equivalent to
\e[1m[0-9]
\e[22m.
2137 Two additional special sequences can appear in character lists. These
2138 apply to non-ASCII character sets, which can have single symbols
2139 (called collating elements) that are represented with more than one
2140 character, as well as several characters that are equivalent for
2141 collating or sorting purposes:
2143 \e[1mCollating Symbols
\e[0m
2144 A collating symbol is a multi-character collating element
2145 enclosed in ``[.'' and ``.]''. For example, if ``ch'' is a
2146 collating element, then
\e[1m[[.ch.]]
\e[22mis a regexp that matches this
2147 collating element, while
\e[1m[ch]
\e[22mis a regexp that matches either
2150 \e[1mEquivalence Classes
\e[0m
2151 An equivalence class is a locale-specific name for a list of
2152 characters that are equivalent. The name is enclosed in ``[=''
2153 and ``=]''. For example, the name ``e'' might be used to
2154 represent all of ``è'' ``é'' and ``e''. In this case,
\e[1m[[=e=]]
\e[0m
2155 is a regexp that matches any of ``è'', ``é'' and ``e''.
2157 A regular expression matching a single character may be followed by
2158 one of several repetition operators:
2160 \e[1m?
\e[22mThe preceding item is optional and matched at most once.
2162 \e[1m*
\e[22mThe preceding item will be matched zero or more times.
2164 \e[1m+
\e[22mThe preceding item will be matched one or more times.
2167 The preceding item is matched exactly
\e[4mn
\e[24m times.
2170 The preceding item is matched
\e[4mn
\e[24m or more times.
2173 The preceding item is matched at most
\e[4mm
\e[24m times.
2176 The preceding item is matched at least
\e[4mn
\e[24m times, but no more than
2179 Two regular expressions may be concatenated; the resulting regular
2180 expression matches any string formed by concatenating two substrings
2181 that respectively match the concatenated subexpressions.
2183 Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator ``|''; the
2184 resulting regular expression matches any string matching either
2187 Repetition takes precedence over concatenation, which in turn takes
2188 precedence over alternation. A whole subexpression may be enclosed in
2189 parentheses to override these precedence rules.
2191 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mIf you compile Mutt with the GNU
\e[4mrx
\e[24m package, the following
2192 operators may also be used in regular expressions:
2195 Matches the empty string at either the beginning or the end of a
2199 Matches the empty string within a word.
2202 Matches the empty string at the beginning of a word.
2205 Matches the empty string at the end of a word.
2208 Matches any word-constituent character (letter, digit, or
2212 Matches any character that is not word-constituent.
2215 Matches the empty string at the beginning of a buffer (string).
2218 Matches the empty string at the end of a buffer.
2220 Please note however that these operators are not defined by POSIX, so
2221 they may or may not be available in stock libraries on various
2224 \e[1m4.2. Patterns
\e[0m
2226 Many of Mutt's commands allow you to specify a pattern to match
2227 (limit, tag-pattern, delete-pattern, etc.). There are several ways to
2231 ~b EXPR messages which contain EXPR in the message body
2232 ~B EXPR messages which contain EXPR in the whole message
2233 ~c USER messages carbon-copied to USER
2234 ~C EXPR message is either to: or cc: EXPR
2236 ~d [MIN]-[MAX] messages with ``date-sent'' in a Date range
2238 ~e EXPR message which contains EXPR in the ``Sender'' field
2240 ~f USER messages originating from USER
2241 ~g cryptographically signed messages
2242 ~G cryptographically encrypted messages
2243 ~H EXPR messages with a spam attribute matching EXPR
2244 ~h EXPR messages which contain EXPR in the message header
2245 ~k message contains PGP key material
2246 ~i ID message which match ID in the ``Message-ID'' field
2247 ~L EXPR message is either originated or received by EXPR
2248 ~l message is addressed to a known mailing list
2249 ~m [MIN]-[MAX] message in the range MIN to MAX *)
2250 ~n [MIN]-[MAX] messages with a score in the range MIN to MAX *)
2253 ~p message is addressed to you (consults alternates)
2254 ~P message is from you (consults alternates)
2255 ~Q messages which have been replied to
2257 ~r [MIN]-[MAX] messages with ``date-received'' in a Date range
2258 ~S superseded messages
2259 ~s SUBJECT messages having SUBJECT in the ``Subject'' field.
2261 ~t USER messages addressed to USER
2263 ~v message is part of a collapsed thread.
2264 ~V cryptographically verified messages
2265 ~x EXPR messages which contain EXPR in the `References' field
2266 ~y EXPR messages which contain EXPR in the `X-Label' field
2267 ~z [MIN]-[MAX] messages with a size in the range MIN to MAX *)
2268 ~= duplicated messages (see $duplicate_threads)
2269 ~$ unreferenced messages (requires threaded view)
2271 Where EXPR, USER, ID, and SUBJECT are ``regular expressions''.
2272 Special attention has to be made when using regular expressions inside
2273 of patterns. Specifically, Mutt's parser for these patterns will
2274 strip one level of backslash (\), which is normally used for quoting.
2275 If it is your intention to use a backslash in the regular expression,
2276 you will need to use two backslashes instead (\\).
2278 *) The forms <[MAX], >[MIN], [MIN]- and -[MAX] are allowed, too.
2280 \e[1m4.2.1. Pattern Modifier
\e[0m
2282 Note that patterns matching 'lists' of addresses (notably c,C,p,P and
2283 t) match if there is at least one match in the whole list. If you want
2284 to make sure that all elements of that list match, you need to prefix
2285 your pattern with ^. This example matches all mails which only has
2286 recipients from Germany.
2290 \e[1m4.2.2. Complex Patterns
\e[0m
2292 Logical AND is performed by specifying more than one criterion. For
2297 would select messages which contain the word ``mutt'' in the list of
2298 recipients
\e[1mand
\e[22mthat have the word ``elkins'' in the ``From'' header
2301 Mutt also recognizes the following operators to create more complex
2304 · ! -- logical NOT operator
2306 · | -- logical OR operator
2308 · () -- logical grouping operator
2310 Here is an example illustrating a complex search pattern. This
2311 pattern will select all messages which do not contain ``mutt'' in the
2312 ``To'' or ``Cc'' field and which are from ``elkins''.
2314 !(~t mutt|~c mutt) ~f elkins
2316 Here is an example using white space in the regular expression (note
2317 the ' and " delimiters). For this to match, the mail's subject must
2318 match the ``^Junk +From +Me$'' and it must be from either ``Jim
2319 +Somebody'' or ``Ed +SomeoneElse'':
2321 '~s "^Junk +From +Me$" ~f ("Jim +Somebody"|"Ed +SomeoneElse")'
2323 Note that if a regular expression contains parenthesis, or a veritical
2324 bar ("|"), you
\e[1mmust
\e[22menclose the expression in double or single quotes
2325 since those characters are also used to separate different parts of
2326 Mutt's pattern language. For example,
2328 ~f "me@(mutt\.org|cs\.hmc\.edu)"
2330 Without the quotes, the parenthesis wouldn't end. This would be
2331 seperated to two OR'd patterns:
\e[4m~f
\e[24m
\e[4mme@(mutt\.org
\e[24m and
\e[4mcs\.hmc\.edu)
\e[24m.
2332 They are never what you want.
2334 \e[1m4.2.3. Searching by Date
\e[0m
2336 Mutt supports two types of dates,
\e[4mabsolute
\e[24m and
\e[4mrelative
\e[24m.
2338 \e[1mAbsolute
\e[22m. Dates
\e[1mmust
\e[22mbe in DD/MM/YY format (month and year are
2339 optional, defaulting to the current month and year). An example of a
2340 valid range of dates is:
2342 Limit to messages matching: ~d 20/1/95-31/10
2344 If you omit the minimum (first) date, and just specify ``-DD/MM/YY'',
2345 all messages
\e[4mbefore
\e[24m the given date will be selected. If you omit the
2346 maximum (second) date, and specify ``DD/MM/YY-'', all messages
\e[4mafter
\e[0m
2347 the given date will be selected. If you specify a single date with no
2348 dash (``-''), only messages sent on the given date will be selected.
2350 \e[1mError Margins
\e[22m. You can add error margins to absolute dates. An error
2351 margin is a sign (+ or -), followed by a digit, followed by one of the
2359 As a special case, you can replace the sign by a ``*'' character,
2360 which is equivalent to giving identical plus and minus error margins.
2362 Example: To select any messages two weeks around January 15, 2001,
2363 you'd use the following pattern:
2365 Limit to messages matching: ~d 15/1/2001*2w
2367 \e[1mRelative
\e[22m. This type of date is relative to the current date, and may
2370 · >
\e[4moffset
\e[24m (messages older than
\e[4moffset
\e[24m units)
2372 · <
\e[4moffset
\e[24m (messages newer than
\e[4moffset
\e[24m units)
2374 · =
\e[4moffset
\e[24m (messages exactly
\e[4moffset
\e[24m units old)
2376 \e[4moffset
\e[24m is specified as a positive number with one of the following
2384 Example: to select messages less than 1 month old, you would use
2386 Limit to messages matching: ~d <1m
2388 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mall dates used when searching are relative to the
\e[1mlocal
\e[22mtime
2389 zone, so unless you change the setting of your ``$index_format'' to
2390 include a %[...] format, these are
\e[1mnot
\e[22mthe dates shown in the main
2393 \e[1m4.3. Using Tags
\e[0m
2395 Sometimes it is desirable to perform an operation on a group of
2396 messages all at once rather than one at a time. An example might be
2397 to save messages to a mailing list to a separate folder, or to delete
2398 all messages with a given subject. To tag all messages matching a
2399 pattern, use the tag-pattern function, which is bound to ``shift-T''
2400 by default. Or you can select individual messages by hand using the
2401 ``tag-message'' function, which is bound to ``t'' by default. See
2402 ``patterns'' for Mutt's pattern matching syntax.
2404 Once you have tagged the desired messages, you can use the ``tag-
2405 prefix'' operator, which is the ``;'' (semicolon) key by default.
2406 When the ``tag-prefix'' operator is used, the
\e[1mnext
\e[22moperation will be
2407 applied to all tagged messages if that operation can be used in that
2408 manner. If the ``$auto_tag'' variable is set, the next operation
2409 applies to the tagged messages automatically, without requiring the
2412 In ``macros'' or ``push'' commands, you can use the ``tag-prefix-
2413 cond'' operator. If there are no tagged messages, mutt will "eat" the
2414 rest of the macro to abort it's execution. Mutt will stop "eating"
2415 the macro when it encounters the ``end-cond'' operator; after this
2416 operator the rest of the macro will be executed as normal.
2417 \e[1m4.4. Using Hooks
\e[0m
2419 A
\e[4mhook
\e[24m is a concept borrowed from the EMACS editor which allows you to
2420 execute arbitrary commands before performing some operation. For
2421 example, you may wish to tailor your configuration based upon which
2422 mailbox you are reading, or to whom you are sending mail. In the Mutt
2423 world, a
\e[4mhook
\e[24m consists of a ``regular expression'' or ``pattern''
2424 along with a configuration option/command. See
2440 for specific details on each type of
\e[4mhook
\e[24m available.
2442 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mif a hook changes configuration settings, these changes remain
2443 effective until the end of the current mutt session. As this is
2444 generally not desired, a default hook needs to be added before all
2445 other hooks to restore configuration defaults. Here is an example with
2446 send-hook and the my_hdr directive:
2448 send-hook . 'unmy_hdr From:'
2449 send-hook ~C'^b@b\.b$' my_hdr from: c@c.c
2451 \e[1m4.4.1. Message Matching in Hooks
\e[0m
2453 Hooks that act upon messages (send-hook, save-hook, fcc-hook, message-
2454 hook) are evaluated in a slightly different manner. For the other
2455 types of hooks, a ``regular expression'' is sufficient. But in
2456 dealing with messages a finer grain of control is needed for matching
2457 since for different purposes you want to match different criteria.
2459 Mutt allows the use of the ``search pattern'' language for matching
2460 messages in hook commands. This works in exactly the same way as it
2461 would when
\e[4mlimiting
\e[24m or
\e[4msearching
\e[24m the mailbox, except that you are
2462 restricted to those operators which match information mutt extracts
2463 from the header of the message (i.e. from, to, cc, date, subject,
2466 For example, if you wanted to set your return address based upon
2467 sending mail to a specific address, you could do something like:
2469 send-hook '~t ^me@cs\.hmc\.edu$' 'my_hdr From: Mutt User <user@host>'
2471 which would execute the given command when sending mail to
2472 \e[4mme@cs.hmc.edu
\e[24m.
2473 However, it is not required that you write the pattern to match using
2474 the full searching language. You can still specify a simple
\e[4mregular
\e[0m
2475 \e[4mexpression
\e[24m like the other hooks, in which case Mutt will translate
2476 your pattern into the full language, using the translation specified
2477 by the ``$default_hook'' variable. The pattern is translated at the
2478 time the hook is declared, so the value of ``$default_hook'' that is
2479 in effect at that time will be used.
2481 \e[1m4.5. External Address Queries
\e[0m
2483 Mutt supports connecting to external directory databases such as LDAP,
2484 ph/qi, bbdb, or NIS through a wrapper script which connects to mutt
2485 using a simple interface. Using the ``$query_command'' variable, you
2486 specify the wrapper command to use. For example:
2488 set query_command = "mutt_ldap_query.pl '%s'"
2490 The wrapper script should accept the query on the command-line. It
2491 should return a one line message, then each matching response on a
2492 single line, each line containing a tab separated address then name
2493 then some other optional information. On error, or if there are no
2494 matching addresses, return a non-zero exit code and a one line error
2497 An example multiple response output:
2499 Searching database ... 20 entries ... 3 matching:
2500 me@cs.hmc.edu Michael Elkins mutt dude
2501 blong@fiction.net Brandon Long mutt and more
2502 roessler@guug.de Thomas Roessler mutt pgp
2504 There are two mechanisms for accessing the query function of mutt.
2505 One is to do a query from the index menu using the query function
2506 (default: Q). This will prompt for a query, then bring up the query
2507 menu which will list the matching responses. From the query menu, you
2508 can select addresses to create aliases, or to mail. You can tag
2509 multiple addresses to mail, start a new query, or have a new query
2510 appended to the current responses.
2512 The other mechanism for accessing the query function is for address
2513 completion, similar to the alias completion. In any prompt for
2514 address entry, you can use the complete-query function (default: ^T)
2515 to run a query based on the current address you have typed. Like
2516 aliases, mutt will look for what you have typed back to the last space
2517 or comma. If there is a single response for that query, mutt will
2518 expand the address in place. If there are multiple responses, mutt
2519 will activate the query menu. At the query menu, you can select one
2520 or more addresses to be added to the prompt.
2522 \e[1m4.6. Mailbox Formats
\e[0m
2524 Mutt supports reading and writing of four different mailbox formats:
2525 mbox, MMDF, MH and Maildir. The mailbox type is autodetected, so
2526 there is no need to use a flag for different mailbox types. When
2527 creating new mailboxes, Mutt uses the default specified with the
2528 ``$mbox_type'' variable.
2530 \e[1mmbox
\e[22m. This is the most widely used mailbox format for UNIX. All
2531 messages are stored in a single file. Each message has a line of the
2534 From me@cs.hmc.edu Fri, 11 Apr 1997 11:44:56 PST
2536 to denote the start of a new message (this is often referred to as the
2539 \e[1mMMDF
\e[22m. This is a variant of the
\e[4mmbox
\e[24m format. Each message is
2540 surrounded by lines containing ``^A^A^A^A'' (four control-A's).
2542 \e[1mMH
\e[22m. A radical departure from
\e[4mmbox
\e[24m and
\e[4mMMDF
\e[24m, a mailbox consists of a
2543 directory and each message is stored in a separate file. The filename
2544 indicates the message number (however, this is may not correspond to
2545 the message number Mutt displays). Deleted messages are renamed with a
2546 comma (,) prepended to the filename.
\e[1mNote:
\e[22mMutt detects this type of
2547 mailbox by looking for either .mh_sequences or .xmhcache (needed to
2548 distinguish normal directories from MH mailboxes).
2550 \e[1mMaildir
\e[22m. The newest of the mailbox formats, used by the Qmail MTA (a
2551 replacement for sendmail). Similar to
\e[4mMH
\e[24m, except that it adds three
2552 subdirectories of the mailbox:
\e[4mtmp
\e[24m,
\e[4mnew
\e[24m and
\e[4mcur
\e[24m. Filenames for the
2553 messages are chosen in such a way they are unique, even when two
2554 programs are writing the mailbox over NFS, which means that no file
2557 \e[1m4.7. Mailbox Shortcuts
\e[0m
2559 There are a number of built in shortcuts which refer to specific
2560 mailboxes. These shortcuts can be used anywhere you are prompted for
2561 a file or mailbox path.
2563 · ! -- refers to your ``$spoolfile'' (incoming) mailbox
2565 · > -- refers to your ``$mbox'' file
2567 · < -- refers to your ``$record'' file
2569 · - or !! -- refers to the file you've last visited
2571 · ~ -- refers to your home directory
2573 · = or + -- refers to your ``$folder'' directory
2575 · @
\e[4malias
\e[24m -- refers to the ``default save folder'' as determined by
2576 the address of the alias
2578 \e[1m4.8. Handling Mailing Lists
\e[0m
2580 Mutt has a few configuration options that make dealing with large
2581 amounts of mail easier. The first thing you must do is to let Mutt
2582 know what addresses you consider to be mailing lists (technically this
2583 does not have to be a mailing list, but that is what it is most often
2584 used for), and what lists you are subscribed to. This is accomplished
2585 through the use of the ``lists and subscribe'' commands in your
2588 Now that Mutt knows what your mailing lists are, it can do several
2589 things, the first of which is the ability to show the name of a list
2590 through which you received a message (i.e., of a subscribed list) in
2591 the
\e[4mindex
\e[24m menu display. This is useful to distinguish between
2592 personal and list mail in the same mailbox. In the ``$index_format''
2593 variable, the escape ``%L'' will return the string ``To <list>'' when
2594 ``list'' appears in the ``To'' field, and ``Cc <list>'' when it
2595 appears in the ``Cc'' field (otherwise it returns the name of the
2598 Often times the ``To'' and ``Cc'' fields in mailing list messages tend
2599 to get quite large. Most people do not bother to remove the author of
2600 the message they are reply to from the list, resulting in two or more
2601 copies being sent to that person. The ``list-reply'' function, which
2602 by default is bound to ``L'' in the
\e[4mindex
\e[24m menu and
\e[4mpager
\e[24m, helps reduce
2603 the clutter by only replying to the known mailing list addresses
2604 instead of all recipients (except as specified by Mail-Followup-To,
2607 Mutt also supports the Mail-Followup-To header. When you send a
2608 message to a list of recipients which includes one or several
2609 subscribed mailing lists, and if the ``$followup_to'' option is set,
2610 mutt will generate a Mail-Followup-To header which contains all the
2611 recipients to whom you send this message, but not your address. This
2612 indicates that group-replies or list-replies (also known as
2613 ``followups'') to this message should only be sent to the original
2614 recipients of the message, and not separately to you - you'll receive
2615 your copy through one of the mailing lists you are subscribed to.
2617 Conversely, when group-replying or list-replying to a message which
2618 has a Mail-Followup-To header, mutt will respect this header if the
2619 ``$honor_followup_to'' configuration variable is set. Using list-
2620 reply will in this case also make sure that the reply goes to the
2621 mailing list, even if it's not specified in the list of recipients in
2622 the Mail-Followup-To.
2624 Note that, when header editing is enabled, you can create a Mail-
2625 Followup-To header manually. Mutt will only auto-generate this header
2626 if it doesn't exist when you send the message.
2628 The other method some mailing list admins use is to generate a
2629 ``Reply-To'' field which points back to the mailing list address
2630 rather than the author of the message. This can create problems when
2631 trying to reply directly to the author in private, since most mail
2632 clients will automatically reply to the address given in the ``Reply-
2633 To'' field. Mutt uses the ``$reply_to'' variable to help decide which
2634 address to use. If set to
\e[4mask-yes
\e[24m or
\e[4mask-no
\e[24m, you will be prompted as
2635 to whether or not you would like to use the address given in the
2636 ``Reply-To'' field, or reply directly to the address given in the
2637 ``From'' field. When set to
\e[4myes
\e[24m, the ``Reply-To'' field will be used
2640 The ``X-Label:'' header field can be used to further identify mailing
2641 lists or list subject matter (or just to annotate messages
2642 individually). The ``$index_format'' variable's ``%y'' and ``%Y''
2643 escapes can be used to expand ``X-Label:'' fields in the index, and
2644 Mutt's pattern-matcher can match regular expressions to ``X-Label:''
2645 fields with the ``y'' selector. ``X-Label:'' is not a standard
2646 message header field, but it can easily be inserted by procmail and
2647 other mail filtering agents.
2649 Lastly, Mutt has the ability to ``sort'' the mailbox into ``threads''.
2650 A thread is a group of messages which all relate to the same subject.
2651 This is usually organized into a tree-like structure where a message
2652 and all of its replies are represented graphically. If you've ever
2653 used a threaded news client, this is the same concept. It makes
2654 dealing with large volume mailing lists easier because you can easily
2655 delete uninteresting threads and quickly find topics of value.
2657 \e[1m4.9. Delivery Status Notification (DSN) Support
\e[0m
2659 RFC1894 defines a set of MIME content types for relaying information
2660 about the status of electronic mail messages. These can be thought of
2661 as ``return receipts.'' Berkeley sendmail 8.8.x currently has some
2662 command line options in which the mail client can make requests as to
2663 what type of status messages should be returned.
2665 To support this, there are two variables. ``$dsn_notify'' is used to
2666 request receipts for different results (such as failed message,
2667 message delivered, etc.). ``$dsn_return'' requests how much of your
2668 message should be returned with the receipt (headers or full message).
2669 Refer to the man page on sendmail for more details on DSN.
2671 \e[1m4.10. POP3 Support (OPTIONAL)
\e[0m
2673 If Mutt was compiled with POP3 support (by running the
\e[4mconfigure
\e[0m
2674 script with the
\e[4m--enable-pop
\e[24m flag), it has the ability to work with
2675 mailboxes located on a remote POP3 server and fetch mail for local
2678 You can access the remote POP3 mailbox by selecting the folder
2681 You can select an alternative port by specifying it with the server,
2682 ie: pop://popserver:port/.
2684 You can also specify different username for each folder, ie:
2685 pop://username@popserver[:port]/.
2687 Polling for new mail is more expensive over POP3 than locally. For
2688 this reason the frequency at which Mutt will check for mail remotely
2689 can be controlled by the ``$pop_checkinterval'' variable, which
2690 defaults to every 60 seconds.
2692 If Mutt was compiled with SSL support (by running the
\e[4mconfigure
\e[24m script
2693 with the
\e[4m--with-ssl
\e[24m flag), connections to POP3 servers can be
2694 encrypted. This naturally requires that the server supports SSL
2695 encrypted connections. To access a folder with POP3/SSL, you should
2696 use pops: prefix, ie: pops://[username@]popserver[:port]/.
2698 Another way to access your POP3 mail is the
\e[4mfetch-mail
\e[24m function
2699 (default: G). It allows to connect to ``pop_host'', fetch all your
2700 new mail and place it in the local ``spoolfile''. After this point,
2701 Mutt runs exactly as if the mail had always been local.
2703 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mIf you only need to fetch all messages to local mailbox you
2704 should consider using a specialized program, such as fetchmail
2706 \e[1m4.11. IMAP Support (OPTIONAL)
\e[0m
2708 If Mutt was compiled with IMAP support (by running the
\e[4mconfigure
\e[0m
2709 script with the
\e[4m--enable-imap
\e[24m flag), it has the ability to work with
2710 folders located on a remote IMAP server.
2712 You can access the remote inbox by selecting the folder
2713 imap://imapserver/INBOX, where imapserver is the name of the IMAP
2714 server and INBOX is the special name for your spool mailbox on the
2715 IMAP server. If you want to access another mail folder at the IMAP
2716 server, you should use imap://imapserver/path/to/folder where
2717 path/to/folder is the path of the folder you want to access.
2719 You can select an alternative port by specifying it with the server,
2720 ie: imap://imapserver:port/INBOX.
2722 You can also specify different username for each folder, ie:
2723 imap://username@imapserver[:port]/INBOX.
2725 If Mutt was compiled with SSL support (by running the
\e[4mconfigure
\e[24m script
2726 with the
\e[4m--with-ssl
\e[24m flag), connections to IMAP servers can be
2727 encrypted. This naturally requires that the server supports SSL
2728 encrypted connections. To access a folder with IMAP/SSL, you should
2729 use imaps://[username@]imapserver[:port]/path/to/folder as your folder
2732 Pine-compatible notation is also supported, ie
2733 {[username@]imapserver[:port][/ssl]}path/to/folder
2735 Note that not all servers use / as the hierarchy separator. Mutt
2736 should correctly notice which separator is being used by the server
2737 and convert paths accordingly.
2739 When browsing folders on an IMAP server, you can toggle whether to
2740 look at only the folders you are subscribed to, or all folders with
2741 the
\e[4mtoggle-subscribed
\e[24m command. See also the ``$imap_list_subscribed''
2744 Polling for new mail on an IMAP server can cause noticeable delays.
2745 So, you'll want to carefully tune the ``$mail_check'' and ``$timeout''
2746 variables. Personally I use
2751 with relatively good results over my slow modem line.
2753 Note that if you are using mbox as the mail store on UW servers prior
2754 to v12.250, the server has been reported to disconnect a client if
2755 another client selects the same folder.
2757 \e[1m4.11.1. The Folder Browser
\e[0m
2759 As of version 1.2, mutt supports browsing mailboxes on an IMAP server.
2760 This is mostly the same as the local file browser, with the following
2763 · In lieu of file permissions, mutt displays the string "IMAP",
2764 possibly followed by the symbol "+", indicating that the entry
2765 contains both messages and subfolders. On Cyrus-like servers
2766 folders will often contain both messages and subfolders.
2768 · For the case where an entry can contain both messages and
2769 subfolders, the selection key (bound to enter by default) will
2770 choose to descend into the subfolder view. If you wish to view the
2771 messages in that folder, you must use view-file instead (bound to
2774 · You can delete mailboxes with the delete-mailbox command (bound to
2775 d by default. You may also subscribe and unsubscribe to mailboxes
2776 (normally these are bound to s and u, respectively).
2778 \e[1m4.11.2. Authentication
\e[0m
2780 Mutt supports four authentication methods with IMAP servers: SASL,
2781 GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, and LOGIN (there is a patch by Grant Edwards to add
2782 NTLM authentication for you poor exchange users out there, but it has
2783 yet to be integrated into the main tree). There is also support for
2784 the pseudo-protocol ANONYMOUS, which allows you to log in to a public
2785 IMAP server without having an account. To use ANONYMOUS, simply make
2786 your username blank or "anonymous".
2788 SASL is a special super-authenticator, which selects among several
2789 protocols (including GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, ANONYMOUS, and DIGEST-MD5) the
2790 most secure method available on your host and the server. Using some
2791 of these methods (including DIGEST-MD5 and possibly GSSAPI), your
2792 entire session will be encrypted and invisible to those teeming
2793 network snoops. It is the best option if you have it. To use it, you
2794 must have the Cyrus SASL library installed on your system and compile
2795 mutt with the
\e[4m--with-sasl
\e[24m flag.
2797 Mutt will try whichever methods are compiled in and available on the
2798 server, in the following order: SASL, ANONYMOUS, GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5,
2801 There are a few variables which control authentication:
2803 · ``$imap_user'' - controls the username under which you request
2804 authentication on the IMAP server, for all authenticators. This is
2805 overridden by an explicit username in the mailbox path (ie by using
2806 a mailbox name of the form {user@host}).
2808 · ``$imap_pass'' - a password which you may preset, used by all
2809 authentication methods where a password is needed.
2811 · ``$imap_authenticators'' - a colon-delimited list of IMAP
2812 authentication methods to try, in the order you wish to try them.
2813 If specified, this overrides mutt's default (attempt everything, in
2814 the order listed above).
2816 \e[1m4.12. Managing multiple IMAP/POP accounts (OPTIONAL)
\e[0m
2818 If you happen to have accounts on multiple IMAP and/or POP servers,
2819 you may find managing all the authentication settings inconvenient and
2820 error-prone. The account-hook command may help. This hook works like
2821 folder-hook but is invoked whenever you access a remote mailbox
2822 (including inside the folder browser), not just when you open the
2827 account-hook . 'unset imap_user; unset imap_pass; unset tunnel'
2828 account-hook imap://host1/ 'set imap_user=me1 imap_pass=foo'
2829 account-hook imap://host2/ 'set tunnel="ssh host2 /usr/libexec/imapd"'
2831 \e[1m4.13. Start a WWW Browser on URLs (EXTERNAL)
\e[0m
2833 If a message contains URLs (
\e[4munified
\e[24m
\e[4mresource
\e[24m
\e[4mlocator
\e[24m = address in the
2834 WWW space like
\e[4mhttp://www.mutt.org/
\e[24m), it is efficient to get a menu
2835 with all the URLs and start a WWW browser on one of them. This
2836 functionality is provided by the external urlview program which can be
2837 retrieved at ftp://ftp.mutt.org/mutt/contrib/ and the configuration
2840 macro index \cb |urlview\n
2841 macro pager \cb |urlview\n
2843 \e[1m5. Mutt's MIME Support
\e[0m
2845 Quite a bit of effort has been made to make Mutt the premier text-mode
2846 MIME MUA. Every effort has been made to provide the functionality
2847 that the discerning MIME user requires, and the conformance to the
2848 standards wherever possible. When configuring Mutt for MIME, there
2849 are two extra types of configuration files which Mutt uses. One is
2850 the mime.types file, which contains the mapping of file extensions to
2851 IANA MIME types. The other is the mailcap file, which specifies the
2852 external commands to use for handling specific MIME types.
2854 \e[1m5.1. Using MIME in Mutt
\e[0m
2856 There are three areas/menus in Mutt which deal with MIME, they are the
2857 pager (while viewing a message), the attachment menu and the compose
2860 \e[1m5.1.1. Viewing MIME messages in the pager
\e[0m
2862 When you select a message from the index and view it in the pager,
2863 Mutt decodes the message to a text representation. Mutt internally
2864 supports a number of MIME types, including text/plain, text/enriched,
2865 message/rfc822, and message/news. In addition, the export controlled
2866 version of Mutt recognizes a variety of PGP MIME types, including
2867 PGP/MIME and application/pgp.
2869 Mutt will denote attachments with a couple lines describing them.
2870 These lines are of the form:
2872 [-- Attachment #1: Description --]
2873 [-- Type: text/plain, Encoding: 7bit, Size: 10000 --]
2875 Where the Description is the description or filename given for the
2876 attachment, and the Encoding is one of 7bit/8bit/quoted-print-
2878 If Mutt cannot deal with a MIME type, it will display a message like:
2880 [-- image/gif is unsupported (use 'v' to view this part) --]
2882 \e[1m5.1.2. The Attachment Menu
\e[0m
2884 The default binding for view-attachments is `v', which displays the
2885 attachment menu for a message. The attachment menu displays a list of
2886 the attachments in a message. From the attachment menu, you can save,
2887 print, pipe, delete, and view attachments. You can apply these
2888 operations to a group of attachments at once, by tagging the
2889 attachments and by using the ``tag-prefix'' operator. You can also
2890 reply to the current message from this menu, and only the current
2891 attachment (or the attachments tagged) will be quoted in your reply.
2892 You can view attachments as text, or view them using the mailcap
2895 Finally, you can apply the usual message-related functions (like
2896 ``resend-message'', and the reply and forward functions) to
2897 attachments of type message/rfc822.
2899 See the help on the attachment menu for more information.
2901 \e[1m5.1.3. The Compose Menu
\e[0m
2903 The compose menu is the menu you see before you send a message. It
2904 allows you to edit the recipient list, the subject, and other aspects
2905 of your message. It also contains a list of the attachments of your
2906 message, including the main body. From this menu, you can print,
2907 copy, filter, pipe, edit, compose, review, and rename an attachment or
2908 a list of tagged attachments. You can also modifying the attachment
2909 information, notably the type, encoding and description.
2911 Attachments appear as follows:
2913 - 1 [text/plain, 7bit, 1K] /tmp/mutt-euler-8082-0 <no description>
2914 2 [applica/x-gunzip, base64, 422K] ~/src/mutt-0.85.tar.gz <no description>
2916 The '-' denotes that Mutt will delete the file after sending (or
2917 postponing, or cancelling) the message. It can be toggled with the
2918 toggle-unlink command (default: u). The next field is the MIME
2919 content-type, and can be changed with the edit-type command (default:
2920 ^T). The next field is the encoding for the attachment, which allows
2921 a binary message to be encoded for transmission on 7bit links. It can
2922 be changed with the edit-encoding command (default: ^E). The next
2923 field is the size of the attachment, rounded to kilobytes or
2924 megabytes. The next field is the filename, which can be changed with
2925 the rename-file command (default: R). The final field is the
2926 description of the attachment, and can be changed with the edit-
2927 description command (default: d).
2929 \e[1m5.2. MIME Type configuration with mime.types
\e[0m
2931 When you add an attachment to your mail message, Mutt searches your
2932 personal mime.types file at ${HOME}/.mime.types, and then the system
2933 mime.types file at /usr/local/share/mutt/mime.types or /etc/mime.types
2935 The mime.types file consist of lines containing a MIME type and a
2936 space separated list of extensions. For example:
2938 application/postscript ps eps
2940 audio/x-aiff aif aifc aiff
2942 A sample mime.types file comes with the Mutt distribution, and should
2943 contain most of the MIME types you are likely to use.
2945 If Mutt can not determine the mime type by the extension of the file
2946 you attach, it will look at the file. If the file is free of binary
2947 information, Mutt will assume that the file is plain text, and mark it
2948 as text/plain. If the file contains binary information, then Mutt
2949 will mark it as application/octet-stream. You can change the MIME
2950 type that Mutt assigns to an attachment by using the edit-type command
2951 from the compose menu (default: ^T). The MIME type is actually a major
2952 mime type followed by the sub-type, separated by a '/'. 6 major types:
2953 application, text, image, video, audio, and model have been approved
2954 after various internet discussions. Mutt recognises all of these if
2955 the appropriate entry is found in the mime.types file. It also
2956 recognises other major mime types, such as the chemical type that is
2957 widely used in the molecular modelling community to pass molecular
2958 data in various forms to various molecular viewers. Non-recognised
2959 mime types should only be used if the recipient of the message is
2960 likely to be expecting such attachments.
2962 \e[1m5.3. MIME Viewer configuration with mailcap
\e[0m
2964 Mutt supports RFC 1524 MIME Configuration, in particular the Unix
2965 specific format specified in Appendix A of RFC 1524. This file format
2966 is commonly referred to as the mailcap format. Many MIME compliant
2967 programs utilize the mailcap format, allowing you to specify handling
2968 for all MIME types in one place for all programs. Programs known to
2969 use this format include Netscape, XMosaic, lynx and metamail.
2971 In order to handle various MIME types that Mutt can not handle
2972 internally, Mutt parses a series of external configuration files to
2973 find an external handler. The default search string for these files
2974 is a colon delimited list set to
2976 ${HOME}/.mailcap:/usr/local/share/mutt/mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/usr/etc/mailcap:/usr/local/etc/mailcap
2978 where $HOME is your home directory.
2980 In particular, the metamail distribution will install a mailcap file,
2981 usually as /usr/local/etc/mailcap, which contains some baseline
2984 \e[1m5.3.1. The Basics of the mailcap file
\e[0m
2986 A mailcap file consists of a series of lines which are comments,
2987 blank, or definitions.
2989 A comment line consists of a # character followed by anything you
2991 A blank line is blank.
2993 A definition line consists of a content type, a view command, and any
2994 number of optional fields. Each field of a definition line is divided
2995 by a semicolon ';' character.
2997 The content type is specified in the MIME standard type/subtype
2998 method. For example, text/plain, text/html, image/gif, etc. In
2999 addition, the mailcap format includes two formats for wildcards, one
3000 using the special '*' subtype, the other is the implicit wild, where
3001 you only include the major type. For example, image/*, or video, will
3002 match all image types and video types, respectively.
3004 The view command is a Unix command for viewing the type specified.
3005 There are two different types of commands supported. The default is to
3006 send the body of the MIME message to the command on stdin. You can
3007 change this behaviour by using %s as a parameter to your view command.
3008 This will cause Mutt to save the body of the MIME message to a
3009 temporary file, and then call the view command with the %s replaced by
3010 the name of the temporary file. In both cases, Mutt will turn over the
3011 terminal to the view program until the program quits, at which time
3012 Mutt will remove the temporary file if it exists.
3014 So, in the simplest form, you can send a text/plain message to the
3015 external pager more on stdin:
3019 Or, you could send the message as a file:
3023 Perhaps you would like to use lynx to interactively view a text/html
3028 In this case, lynx does not support viewing a file from stdin, so you
3029 must use the %s syntax.
\e[1mNote:
\e[4m
\e[22mSome
\e[24m
\e[4molder
\e[24m
\e[4mversions
\e[24m
\e[4mof
\e[24m
\e[4mlynx
\e[24m
\e[4mcontain
\e[24m
\e[4ma
\e[0m
3030 \e[4mbug
\e[24m
\e[4mwhere
\e[24m
\e[4mthey
\e[24m
\e[4mwill
\e[24m
\e[4mcheck
\e[24m
\e[4mthe
\e[24m
\e[4mmailcap
\e[24m
\e[4mfile
\e[24m
\e[4mfor
\e[24m
\e[4ma
\e[24m
\e[4mviewer
\e[24m
\e[4mfor
\e[24m
\e[4mtext/html.
\e[0m
3031 \e[4mThey
\e[24m
\e[4mwill
\e[24m
\e[4mfind
\e[24m
\e[4mthe
\e[24m
\e[4mline
\e[24m
\e[4mwhich
\e[24m
\e[4mcalls
\e[24m
\e[4mlynx,
\e[24m
\e[4mand
\e[24m
\e[4mrun
\e[24m
\e[4mit.
\e[24m
\e[4mThis
\e[24m
\e[4mcauses
\e[0m
3032 \e[4mlynx
\e[24m
\e[4mto
\e[24m
\e[4mcontinuously
\e[24m
\e[4mspawn
\e[24m
\e[4mitself
\e[24m
\e[4mto
\e[24m
\e[4mview
\e[24m
\e[4mthe
\e[24m
\e[4mobject.
\e[0m
3034 On the other hand, maybe you don't want to use lynx interactively, you
3035 just want to have it convert the text/html to text/plain, then you can
3038 text/html; lynx -dump %s | more
3040 Perhaps you wish to use lynx to view text/html files, and a pager on
3041 all other text formats, then you would use the following:
3046 This is the simplest form of a mailcap file.
3048 \e[1m5.3.2. Secure use of mailcap
\e[0m
3050 The interpretion of shell meta-characters embedded in MIME parameters
3051 can lead to security problems in general. Mutt tries to quote
3052 parameters in expansion of %s syntaxes properly, and avoids risky
3053 characters by substituting them, see the ``mailcap_sanitize''
3056 Although mutt's procedures to invoke programs with mailcap seem to be
3057 safe, there are other applications parsing mailcap, maybe taking less
3058 care of it. Therefore you should pay attention to the following
3061 \e[4mKeep
\e[24m
\e[4mthe
\e[24m
\e[4m%-expandos
\e[24m
\e[4maway
\e[24m
\e[4mfrom
\e[24m
\e[4mshell
\e[24m
\e[4mquoting.
\e[24m Don't quote them with
3062 single or double quotes. Mutt does this for you, the right way, as
3063 should any other program which interprets mailcap. Don't put them
3064 into backtick expansions. Be highly careful with eval statements, and
3065 avoid them if possible at all. Trying to fix broken behaviour with
3066 quotes introduces new leaks - there is no alternative to correct
3067 quoting in the first place.
3069 If you have to use the %-expandos' values in context where you need
3070 quoting or backtick expansions, put that value into a shell variable
3071 and reference the shell variable where necessary, as in the following
3072 example (using $charset inside the backtick expansion is safe, since
3073 it is not itself subject to any further expansion):
3075 text/test-mailcap-bug; cat %s; copiousoutput; test=charset=%{charset} \
3076 && test "`echo $charset | tr '[A-Z]' '[a-z]'`" != iso-8859-1
3078 \e[1m5.3.3. Advanced mailcap Usage
\e[0m
3080 \e[1m5.3.3.1. Optional Fields
\e[0m
3082 In addition to the required content-type and view command fields, you
3083 can add semi-colon ';' separated fields to set flags and other
3084 options. Mutt recognizes the following optional fields:
3086 \e[1mcopiousoutput
\e[0m
3087 This flag tells Mutt that the command passes possibly large
3088 amounts of text on stdout. This causes Mutt to invoke a pager
3089 (either the internal pager or the external pager defined by the
3090 pager variable) on the output of the view command. Without this
3091 flag, Mutt assumes that the command is interactive. One could
3092 use this to replace the pipe to more in the lynx -dump example
3093 in the Basic section:
3095 text/html; lynx -dump %s ; copiousoutput
3097 This will cause lynx to format the text/html output as text/plain
3098 and Mutt will use your standard pager to display the results.
3100 \e[1mneedsterminal
\e[0m
3101 Mutt uses this flag when viewing attachments with ``autoview'',
3102 in order to decide whether it should honor the setting of the
3103 ``$wait_key'' variable or not. When an attachment is viewed
3104 using an interactive program, and the corresponding mailcap
3105 entry has a
\e[4mneedsterminal
\e[24m flag, Mutt will use ``$wait_key'' and
3106 the exit status of the program to decide if it will ask you to
3107 press a key after the external program has exited. In all other
3108 situations it will not prompt you for a key.
3110 \e[1mcompose=<command>
\e[0m
3111 This flag specifies the command to use to create a new
3112 attachment of a specific MIME type. Mutt supports this from the
3115 \e[1mcomposetyped=<command>
\e[0m
3116 This flag specifies the command to use to create a new
3117 attachment of a specific MIME type. This command differs from
3118 the compose command in that mutt will expect standard MIME
3119 headers on the data. This can be used to specify parameters,
3120 filename, description, etc. for a new attachment. Mutt
3121 supports this from the compose menu.
3123 \e[1mprint=<command>
\e[0m
3124 This flag specifies the command to use to print a specific MIME
3125 type. Mutt supports this from the attachment and compose menus.
3127 \e[1medit=<command>
\e[0m
3128 This flag specifies the command to use to edit a specific MIME
3129 type. Mutt supports this from the compose menu, and also uses
3130 it to compose new attachments. Mutt will default to the defined
3131 editor for text attachments.
3133 \e[1mnametemplate=<template>
\e[0m
3134 This field specifies the format for the file denoted by %s in
3135 the command fields. Certain programs will require a certain
3136 file extension, for instance, to correctly view a file. For
3137 instance, lynx will only interpret a file as text/html if the
3138 file ends in .html. So, you would specify lynx as a text/html
3139 viewer with a line in the mailcap file like:
3141 text/html; lynx %s; nametemplate=%s.html
3143 \e[1mtest=<command>
\e[0m
3144 This field specifies a command to run to test whether this
3145 mailcap entry should be used. The command is defined with the
3146 command expansion rules defined in the next section. If the
3147 command returns 0, then the test passed, and Mutt uses this
3148 entry. If the command returns non-zero, then the test failed,
3149 and Mutt continues searching for the right entry.
\e[1mNote:
\e[4m
\e[22mthe
\e[0m
3150 \e[4mcontent-type
\e[24m
\e[4mmust
\e[24m
\e[4mmatch
\e[24m
\e[4mbefore
\e[24m
\e[4mMutt
\e[24m
\e[4mperforms
\e[24m
\e[4mthe
\e[24m
\e[4mtest.
\e[24m For
3153 text/html; netscape -remote 'openURL(%s)' ; test=RunningX
3156 In this example, Mutt will run the program RunningX which will
3157 return 0 if the X Window manager is running, and non-zero if it
3158 isn't. If RunningX returns 0, then Mutt will call netscape to dis-
3159 play the text/html object. If RunningX doesn't return 0, then Mutt
3160 will go on to the next entry and use lynx to display the text/html
3163 \e[1m5.3.3.2. Search Order
\e[0m
3165 When searching for an entry in the mailcap file, Mutt will search for
3166 the most useful entry for its purpose. For instance, if you are
3167 attempting to print an image/gif, and you have the following entries
3168 in your mailcap file, Mutt will search for an entry with the print
3172 image/gif; ; print= anytopnm %s | pnmtops | lpr; \
3175 Mutt will skip the image/* entry and use the image/gif entry with the
3178 In addition, you can use this with ``Autoview'' to denote two commands
3179 for viewing an attachment, one to be viewed automatically, the other
3180 to be viewed interactively from the attachment menu. In addition, you
3181 can then use the test feature to determine which viewer to use
3182 interactively depending on your environment.
3184 text/html; netscape -remote 'openURL(%s)' ; test=RunningX
3185 text/html; lynx %s; nametemplate=%s.html
3186 text/html; lynx -dump %s; nametemplate=%s.html; copiousoutput
3188 For ``Autoview'', Mutt will choose the third entry because of the
3189 copiousoutput tag. For interactive viewing, Mutt will run the program
3190 RunningX to determine if it should use the first entry. If the pro-
3191 gram returns non-zero, Mutt will use the second entry for interactive
3194 \e[1m5.3.3.3. Command Expansion
\e[0m
3196 The various commands defined in the mailcap files are passed to the
3197 /bin/sh shell using the system() function. Before the command is
3198 passed to /bin/sh -c, it is parsed to expand various special
3199 parameters with information from Mutt. The keywords Mutt expands are:
3201 \e[1m%s
\e[22mAs seen in the basic mailcap section, this variable is expanded
3202 to a filename specified by the calling program. This file
3203 contains the body of the message to view/print/edit or where the
3204 composing program should place the results of composition. In
3205 addition, the use of this keyword causes Mutt to not pass the
3206 body of the message to the view/print/edit program on stdin.
3208 \e[1m%t
\e[22mMutt will expand %t to the text representation of the content
3209 type of the message in the same form as the first parameter of
3210 the mailcap definition line, ie text/html or image/gif.
3212 \e[1m%{<parameter>}
\e[0m
3213 Mutt will expand this to the value of the specified parameter
3214 from the Content-Type: line of the mail message. For instance,
3215 if Your mail message contains:
3217 Content-Type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3219 then Mutt will expand %{charset} to iso-8859-1. The default meta-
3220 mail mailcap file uses this feature to test the charset to spawn an
3221 xterm using the right charset to view the message.
3223 \e[1m\%
\e[22mThis will be replaced by a %
3225 Mutt does not currently support the %F and %n keywords specified in
3226 RFC 1524. The main purpose of these parameters is for multipart mes-
3227 sages, which is handled internally by Mutt.
3229 \e[1m5.3.4. Example mailcap files
\e[0m
3231 This mailcap file is fairly simple and standard:
3233 ______________________________________________________________________
3234 # I'm always running X :)
3235 video/*; xanim %s > /dev/null
3236 image/*; xv %s > /dev/null
3238 # I'm always running netscape (if my computer had more memory, maybe)
3239 text/html; netscape -remote 'openURL(%s)'
3240 ______________________________________________________________________
3242 This mailcap file shows quite a number of examples:
3244 ______________________________________________________________________
3245 # Use xanim to view all videos Xanim produces a header on startup,
3246 # send that to /dev/null so I don't see it
3247 video/*; xanim %s > /dev/null
3249 # Send html to a running netscape by remote
3250 text/html; netscape -remote 'openURL(%s)'; test=RunningNetscape
3252 # If I'm not running netscape but I am running X, start netscape on the
3254 text/html; netscape %s; test=RunningX
3256 # Else use lynx to view it as text
3259 # This version would convert the text/html to text/plain
3260 text/html; lynx -dump %s; copiousoutput
3262 # I use enscript to print text in two columns to a page
3263 text/*; more %s; print=enscript -2Gr %s
3265 # Netscape adds a flag to tell itself to view jpegs internally
3266 image/jpeg;xv %s; x-mozilla-flags=internal
3268 # Use xv to view images if I'm running X
3269 # In addition, this uses the \ to extend the line and set my editor
3271 image/*;xv %s; test=RunningX; \
3274 # Convert images to text using the netpbm tools
3275 image/*; (anytopnm %s | pnmscale -xysize 80 46 | ppmtopgm | pgmtopbm |
3276 pbmtoascii -1x2 ) 2>&1 ; copiousoutput
3278 # Send excel spreadsheets to my NT box
3279 application/ms-excel; open.pl %s
3280 ______________________________________________________________________
3282 \e[1m5.4. MIME Autoview
\e[0m
3284 In addition to explicitly telling Mutt to view an attachment with the
3285 MIME viewer defined in the mailcap file, Mutt has support for
3286 automatically viewing MIME attachments while in the pager.
3288 To work, you must define a viewer in the mailcap file which uses the
3289 copiousoutput option to denote that it is non-interactive. Usually,
3290 you also use the entry to convert the attachment to a text
3291 representation which you can view in the pager.
3293 You then use the auto_view muttrc command to list the content-types
3294 that you wish to view automatically.
3296 For instance, if you set auto_view to:
3298 auto_view text/html application/x-gunzip application/postscript image/gif application/x-tar-gz
3300 Mutt could use the following mailcap entries to automatically view
3301 attachments of these types.
3303 text/html; lynx -dump %s; copiousoutput; nametemplate=%s.html
3304 image/*; anytopnm %s | pnmscale -xsize 80 -ysize 50 | ppmtopgm | pgmtopbm | pbmtoascii ; copiousoutput
3305 application/x-gunzip; gzcat; copiousoutput
3306 application/x-tar-gz; gunzip -c %s | tar -tf - ; copiousoutput
3307 application/postscript; ps2ascii %s; copiousoutput
3309 ``unauto_view'' can be used to remove previous entries from the
3310 autoview list. This can be used with message-hook to autoview
3311 messages based on size, etc. ``unauto_view *'' will remove all
3314 \e[1m5.5. MIME Multipart/Alternative
\e[0m
3316 Mutt has some heuristics for determining which attachment of a
3317 multipart/alternative type to display. First, mutt will check the
3318 alternative_order list to determine if one of the available types is
3319 preferred. The alternative_order list consists of a number of
3320 mimetypes in order, including support for implicit and explicit
3321 wildcards, for example:
3323 alternative_order text/enriched text/plain text application/postscript image/*
3325 Next, mutt will check if any of the types have a defined
3326 ``auto_view'', and use that. Failing that, Mutt will look for any
3327 text type. As a last attempt, mutt will look for any type it knows
3330 To remove a MIME type from the alternative_order list, use the
3331 unalternative_order command.
3333 \e[1m5.6. MIME Lookup
\e[0m
3335 Mutt's mime_lookup list specifies a list of mime-types that should not
3336 be treated according to their mailcap entry. This option is designed
3337 to deal with binary types such as application/octet-stream. When an
3338 attachment's mime-type is listed in mime_lookup, then the extension of
3339 the filename will be compared to the list of extensions in the
3340 mime.types file. The mime-type associated with this extension will
3341 then be used to process the attachment according to the rules in the
3342 mailcap file and according to any other configuration options (such as
3343 auto_view) specified. Common usage would be:
3345 mime_lookup application/octet-stream application/X-Lotus-Manuscript
3347 In addition, the unmime_lookup command may be used to disable this
3348 feature for any particular mime-type if it had been set, for example,
3351 \e[1m6. Reference
\e[0m
3353 \e[1m6.1. Command line options
\e[0m
3355 Running mutt with no arguments will make Mutt attempt to read your
3356 spool mailbox. However, it is possible to read other mailboxes and to
3357 send messages from the command line as well.
3360 -a attach a file to a message
3361 -b specify a blind carbon-copy (BCC) address
3362 -c specify a carbon-copy (Cc) address
3363 -e specify a config command to be run after initilization files are read
3364 -f specify a mailbox to load
3365 -F specify an alternate file to read initialization commands
3366 -h print help on command line options
3367 -H specify a draft file from which to read a header and body
3368 -i specify a file to include in a message composition
3369 -m specify a default mailbox type
3370 -n do not read the system Muttrc
3371 -p recall a postponed message
3372 -Q query a configuration variable
3373 -R open mailbox in read-only mode
3374 -s specify a subject (enclose in quotes if it contains spaces)
3375 -v show version number and compile-time definitions
3376 -x simulate the mailx(1) compose mode
3377 -y show a menu containing the files specified by the mailboxes command
3378 -z exit immediately if there are no messages in the mailbox
3379 -Z open the first folder with new message,exit immediately if none
3381 To read messages in a mailbox
3383 mutt [ -nz ] [ -F
\e[4mmuttrc
\e[24m ] [ -m
\e[4mtype
\e[24m ] [ -f
\e[4mmailbox
\e[24m ]
3385 To compose a new message
3387 mutt [ -n ] [ -F
\e[4mmuttrc
\e[24m ] [ -a
\e[4mfile
\e[24m ] [ -c
\e[4maddress
\e[24m ] [ -i
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m ] [
3388 -s
\e[4msubject
\e[24m ]
\e[4maddress
\e[24m [
\e[4maddress
\e[24m ... ]
3390 Mutt also supports a ``batch'' mode to send prepared messages. Simply
3391 redirect input from the file you wish to send. For example,
3393 mutt -s "data set for run #2" professor@bigschool.edu < ~/run2.dat
3395 This command will send a message to ``professor@bigschool.edu'' with a
3396 subject of ``data set for run #2''. In the body of the message will
3397 be the contents of the file ``~/run2.dat''.
3399 \e[1m6.2. Configuration Commands
\e[0m
3401 The following are the commands understood by mutt.
3403 · ``account-hook''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
3405 · ``alias''
\e[4mkey
\e[24m
\e[4maddress
\e[24m [ ,
\e[4maddress
\e[24m, ... ]
3407 · ``unalias'' [ * |
\e[4mkey
\e[24m ... ]
3409 · ``alternates''
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
3411 · ``unalternates'' [ * |
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
3413 · ``alternative_order''
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m [
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m ... ]
3415 · ``unalternative_order''
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m [
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m ... ]
3417 · ``auto_view''
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m [
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m ... ]
3419 · ``unauto_view''
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m [
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m ... ]
3421 · ``bind''
\e[4mmap
\e[24m
\e[4mkey
\e[24m
\e[4mfunction
\e[0m
3423 · ``charset-hook''
\e[4malias
\e[24m
\e[4mcharset
\e[0m
3425 · ``color''
\e[4mobject
\e[24m
\e[4mforeground
\e[24m
\e[4mbackground
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ]
3427 · ``uncolor''
\e[4mindex
\e[24m
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
3429 · ``exec''
\e[4mfunction
\e[24m [
\e[4mfunction
\e[24m ... ]
3431 · ``fcc-hook''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mmailbox
\e[0m
3433 · ``fcc-save-hook''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mmailbox
\e[0m
3435 · ``folder-hook''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
3437 · ``hdr_order''
\e[4mheader
\e[24m [
\e[4mheader
\e[24m ... ]
3439 · ``unhdr_order''
\e[4mheader
\e[24m [
\e[4mheader
\e[24m ... ]
3441 · ``iconv-hook''
\e[4mcharset
\e[24m
\e[4mlocal-charset
\e[0m
3443 · ``ignore''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
3445 · ``unignore''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
3447 · ``lists''
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
3449 · ``unlists''
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
3451 · ``macro''
\e[4mmenu
\e[24m
\e[4mkey
\e[24m
\e[4msequence
\e[24m [
\e[4mdescription
\e[24m ]
3453 · ``mailboxes''
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m [
\e[4mfilename
\e[24m ... ]
3455 · ``mbox-hook''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mmailbox
\e[0m
3457 · ``message-hook''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
3459 · ``mime_lookup''
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m [
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m ... ]
3461 · ``unmime_lookup''
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m [
\e[4mmimetype
\e[24m ... ]
3463 · ``mono''
\e[4mobject
\e[24m
\e[4mattribute
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ]
3465 · ``unmono''
\e[4mindex
\e[24m
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
3467 · ``my_hdr''
\e[4mstring
\e[0m
3469 · ``unmy_hdr''
\e[4mfield
\e[24m [
\e[4mfield
\e[24m ... ]
3471 · ``crypt-hook''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mkey-id
\e[0m
3473 · ``push''
\e[4mstring
\e[0m
3475 · ``reset''
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m [
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m ... ]
3477 · ``save-hook''
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m
\e[4mfilename
\e[0m
3479 · ``score''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mvalue
\e[0m
3481 · ``unscore''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m [
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m ... ]
3483 · ``send-hook''
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
3485 · ``reply-hook''
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m
\e[4mcommand
\e[0m
3487 · ``set'' [no|inv]
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m[=
\e[4mvalue
\e[24m] [
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m ... ]
3489 · ``unset''
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m [
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m ... ]
3491 · ``source''
\e[4mfilename
\e[0m
3493 · ``spam''
\e[4mpattern
\e[24m
\e[4mformat
\e[0m
3495 · ``nospam''
\e[4mpattern
\e[0m
3497 · ``subscribe''
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
3499 · ``unsubscribe''
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m [
\e[4mregexp
\e[24m ... ]
3501 · ``toggle''
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m [
\e[4mvariable
\e[24m ... ]
3503 · ``unhook''
\e[4mhook-type
\e[0m
3505 \e[1m6.3. Configuration variables
\e[0m
3507 \e[1m6.3.1. abort_nosubject
\e[0m
3512 If set to
\e[4myes
\e[24m, when composing messages and no subject is given at the
3513 subject prompt, composition will be aborted. If set to
\e[4mno
\e[24m, composing
3514 messages with no subject given at the subject prompt will never be
3517 \e[1m6.3.2. abort_unmodified
\e[0m
3522 If set to
\e[4myes
\e[24m, composition will automatically abort after editing the
3523 message body if no changes are made to the file (this check only
3524 happens after the
\e[4mfirst
\e[24m edit of the file). When set to
\e[4mno
\e[24m,
3525 composition will never be aborted.
3527 \e[1m6.3.3. alias_file
\e[0m
3530 Default: "~/.muttrc"
3532 The default file in which to save aliases created by the ````create-
3535 \e[1mNote:
\e[22mMutt will not automatically source this file; you must
3536 explicitly use the ````source'''' command for it to be executed.
3538 \e[1m6.3.4. alias_format
\e[0m
3541 Default: "%4n %2f %t %-10a %r"
3543 Specifies the format of the data displayed for the `alias' menu. The
3544 following printf(3)-style sequences are available:
3546 \e[1m%a
\e[22malias name
3548 \e[1m%f
\e[22mflags - currently, a "d" for an alias marked for deletion
3550 \e[1m%n
\e[22mindex number
3552 \e[1m%r
\e[22maddress which alias expands to
3554 \e[1m%t
\e[22mcharacter which indicates if the alias is tagged for inclusion
3556 \e[1m6.3.5. allow_8bit
\e[0m
3561 Controls whether 8-bit data is converted to 7-bit using either Quoted-
3562 Printable or Base64 encoding when sending mail.
3564 \e[1m6.3.6. allow_ansi
\e[0m
3569 Controls whether ANSI color codes in messages (and color tags in rich
3570 text messages) are to be interpreted. Messages containing these codes
3571 are rare, but if this option is set, their text will be colored
3572 accordingly. Note that this may override your color choices, and even
3573 present a security problem, since a message could include a line like
3574 "[-- PGP output follows ..." and give it the same color as your
3577 \e[1m6.3.7. arrow_cursor
\e[0m
3582 When set, an arrow (``->'') will be used to indicate the current entry
3583 in menus instead of highlighting the whole line. On slow network or
3584 modem links this will make response faster because there is less that
3585 has to be redrawn on the screen when moving to the next or previous
3586 entries in the menu.
3588 \e[1m6.3.8. ascii_chars
\e[0m
3593 If set, Mutt will use plain ASCII characters when displaying thread
3594 and attachment trees, instead of the default
\e[4mACS
\e[24m characters.
3596 \e[1m6.3.9. askbcc
\e[0m
3601 If set, Mutt will prompt you for blind-carbon-copy (Bcc) recipients
3602 before editing an outgoing message.
3604 \e[1m6.3.10. askcc
\e[0m
3609 If set, Mutt will prompt you for carbon-copy (Cc) recipients before
3610 editing the body of an outgoing message.
3612 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b1.
\b. a
\bas
\bsk
\bk_
\b_f
\bfo
\bol
\bll
\blo
\bow
\bw_
\b_u
\bup
\bp
3617 If set, Mutt will prompt you for follow-up groups before editing the
3618 body of an outgoing message.
3620 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b2.
\b. a
\bas
\bsk
\bk_
\b_x
\bx_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bme
\ben
\bnt
\bt_
\b_t
\bto
\bo
3625 If set, Mutt will prompt you for x-comment-to field before editing the
3626 body of an outgoing message.
3627 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b3.
\b. a
\bat
\btt
\bta
\bac
\bch
\bh_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
3630 Default: "%u%D%I %t%4n %T%.40d%> [%.7m/%.10M, %.6e%?C?, %C?, %s] "
3632 This variable describes the format of the `attachment' menu. The
3633 following printf-style sequences are understood:
3637 %
\b%c
\bc reqiures charset conversion (n or c)
3639 %
\b%D
\bD deleted flag
3641 %
\b%d
\bd description
3643 %
\b%e
\be MIME content-transfer-encoding
3647 %
\b%I
\bI disposition (I=inline, A=attachment)
3649 %
\b%m
\bm major MIME type
3651 %
\b%M
\bM MIME subtype
3653 %
\b%n
\bn attachment number
3657 %
\b%t
\bt tagged flag
3659 %
\b%T
\bT graphic tree characters
3661 %
\b%u
\bu unlink (=to delete) flag
3664 right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
3667 pad to the end of the line with character "X"
3669 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b4.
\b. a
\bat
\btt
\bta
\bac
\bch
\bh_
\b_s
\bse
\bep
\bp
3674 The separator to add between attachments when operating (saving,
3675 printing, piping, etc) on a list of tagged attachments.
3677 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b5.
\b. a
\bat
\btt
\bta
\bac
\bch
\bh_
\b_s
\bsp
\bpl
\bli
\bit
\bt
3682 If this variable is unset, when operating (saving, printing, piping,
3683 etc) on a list of tagged attachments, Mutt will concatenate the
3684 attachments and will operate on them as a single attachment. The
3685 ````$attach_sep'''' separator is added after each attachment. When
3686 set, Mutt will operate on the attachments one by one.
3688 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b6.
\b. a
\bat
\btt
\btr
\bri
\bib
\bbu
\but
\bti
\bio
\bon
\bn
3691 Default: "On %d, %n wrote:"
3693 This is the string that will precede a message which has been included
3694 in a reply. For a full listing of defined printf()-like sequences see
3695 the section on ````$index_format''''.
3697 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b7.
\b. a
\bau
\but
\bto
\boe
\bed
\bdi
\bit
\bt
3702 When set along with ````$edit_headers'''', Mutt will skip the initial
3703 send-menu and allow you to immediately begin editing the body of your
3704 message. The send-menu may still be accessed once you have finished
3705 editing the body of your message.
3707 Also see ````$fast_reply''''.
3709 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b8.
\b. a
\bau
\but
\bto
\bo_
\b_t
\bta
\bag
\bg
3714 When set, functions in the _
\bi_
\bn_
\bd_
\be_
\bx menu which affect a message will be
3715 applied to all tagged messages (if there are any). When unset, you
3716 must first use the tag-prefix function (default: ";") to make the next
3717 function apply to all tagged messages.
3719 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b9.
\b. b
\bbe
\bee
\bep
\bp
3724 When this variable is set, mutt will beep when an error occurs.
3726 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b0.
\b. b
\bbe
\bee
\bep
\bp_
\b_n
\bne
\bew
\bw
3731 When this variable is set, mutt will beep whenever it prints a message
3732 notifying you of new mail. This is independent of the setting of the
3733 ````$beep'''' variable.
3735 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b1.
\b. b
\bbo
\bou
\bun
\bnc
\bce
\be
3740 Controls whether you will be asked to confirm bouncing messages. If
3741 set to _
\by_
\be_
\bs you don't get asked if you want to bounce a message.
3742 Setting this variable to _
\bn_
\bo is not generally useful, and thus not
3743 recommended, because you are unable to bounce messages.
3745 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b2.
\b. b
\bbo
\bou
\bun
\bnc
\bce
\be_
\b_d
\bde
\bel
\bli
\biv
\bve
\ber
\bre
\bed
\bd
3750 When this variable is set, mutt will include Delivered-To headers when
3751 bouncing messages. Postfix users may wish to unset this variable.
3753 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b3.
\b. c
\bca
\bat
\btc
\bch
\bhu
\bup
\bp_
\b_n
\bne
\bew
\bws
\bsg
\bgr
\bro
\bou
\bup
\bp
3758 If this variable is _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will mark all articles in newsgroup as
3759 read when you quit the newsgroup (catchup newsgroup).
3761 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b4.
\b. c
\bch
\bha
\bar
\brs
\bse
\bet
\bt
3766 Character set your terminal uses to display and enter textual data.
3768 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b5.
\b. c
\bch
\bhe
\bec
\bck
\bk_
\b_n
\bne
\bew
\bw
3773 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: this option only affects _
\bm_
\ba_
\bi_
\bl_
\bd_
\bi_
\br and _
\bM_
\bH style mailboxes.
3775 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will check for new mail delivered while the mailbox is
3776 open. Especially with MH mailboxes, this operation can take quite
3777 some time since it involves scanning the directory and checking each
3778 file to see if it has already been looked at. If _
\bc_
\bh_
\be_
\bc_
\bk_
\b__
\bn_
\be_
\bw is _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt,
3779 no check for new mail is performed while the mailbox is open.
3781 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b6.
\b. c
\bco
\bol
\bll
\bla
\bap
\bps
\bse
\be_
\b_u
\bun
\bnr
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bd
3786 When _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will not collapse a thread if it contains any unread
3789 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b7.
\b. u
\bun
\bnc
\bco
\bol
\bll
\bla
\bap
\bps
\bse
\be_
\b_j
\bju
\bum
\bmp
\bp
3794 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will jump to the next unread message, if any, when the
3795 current thread is _
\bu_
\bncollapsed.
3797 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b8.
\b. c
\bco
\bom
\bmp
\bpo
\bos
\bse
\be_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
3800 Default: "-- Mutt: Compose [Approx. msg size: %l Atts: %a]%>-"
3802 Controls the format of the status line displayed in the \fCompose
3803 menu. This string is similar to ````$status_format'''', but has its
3804 own set of printf()-like sequences:
3806 %
\b%a
\ba total number of attachments
3808 %
\b%h
\bh local hostname
3810 %
\b%l
\bl approximate size (in bytes) of the current message
3812 %
\b%v
\bv Mutt version string
3814 See the text describing the ````$status_format'''' option for more
3815 information on how to set ````$compose_format''''.
3817 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b29
\b9.
\b. c
\bco
\bon
\bnf
\bfi
\bir
\brm
\bma
\bap
\bpp
\bpe
\ben
\bnd
\bd
3822 When set, Mutt will prompt for confirmation when appending messages to
3823 an existing mailbox.
3825 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b30
\b0.
\b. c
\bco
\bon
\bnf
\bfi
\bir
\brm
\bmc
\bcr
\bre
\bea
\bat
\bte
\be
3830 When set, Mutt will prompt for confirmation when saving messages to a
3831 mailbox which does not yet exist before creating it.
3833 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b31
\b1.
\b. c
\bco
\bon
\bnn
\bne
\bec
\bct
\bt_
\b_t
\bti
\bim
\bme
\beo
\bou
\but
\bt
3838 Causes Mutt to timeout a network connection (for IMAP or POP) after
3839 this many seconds if the connection is not able to be established. A
3840 negative value causes Mutt to wait indefinitely for the connection to
3843 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b32
\b2.
\b. c
\bco
\bon
\bnt
\bte
\ben
\bnt
\bt_
\b_t
\bty
\byp
\bpe
\be
3846 Default: "text/plain"
3848 Sets the default Content-Type for the body of newly composed messages.
3850 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b33
\b3.
\b. c
\bco
\bop
\bpy
\by
3855 This variable controls whether or not copies of your outgoing messages
3856 will be saved for later references. Also see ````$record'''',
3857 ````$save_name'''', ````$force_name'''' and ````fcc-hook''''.
3859 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b34
\b4.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bto
\bop
\bpg
\bgp
\bp
3864 This variable controls whether or not mutt may automatically enable
3865 PGP encryption/signing for messages. See also
3866 ````$crypt_autoencrypt'''', ````$crypt_replyencrypt'''',
3867 ````$crypt_autosign'''', ````$crypt_replysign'''' and
3868 ````$smime_is_default''''.
3870 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b35
\b5.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bto
\bos
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be
3875 This variable controls whether or not mutt may automatically enable
3876 S/MIME encryption/signing for messages. See also
3877 ````$crypt_autoencrypt'''', ````$crypt_replyencrypt'''',
3878 ````$crypt_autosign'''', ````$crypt_replysign'''' and
3879 ````$smime_is_default''''.
3881 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b36
\b6.
\b. d
\bda
\bat
\bte
\be_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
3884 Default: "!%a, %b %d, %Y at %I:%M:%S%p %Z"
3886 This variable controls the format of the date printed by the ``%d''
3887 sequence in ````$index_format''''. This is passed to the _
\bs_
\bt_
\br_
\bf_
\bt_
\bi_
\bm_
\be
3888 call to process the date. See the man page for _
\bs_
\bt_
\br_
\bf_
\bt_
\bi_
\bm_
\be_
\b(_
\b3_
\b) for the
3891 Unless the first character in the string is a bang (``!''), the month
3892 and week day names are expanded according to the locale specified in
3893 the variable ````$locale''''. If the first character in the string is
3894 a bang, the bang is discarded, and the month and week day names in the
3895 rest of the string are expanded in the _
\bC locale (that is in US
3898 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b37
\b7.
\b. d
\bde
\bef
\bfa
\bau
\bul
\blt
\bt_
\b_h
\bho
\boo
\bok
\bk
3901 Default: "~f %s !~P | (~P ~C %s)"
3903 This variable controls how send-hooks, message-hooks, save-hooks, and
3904 fcc-hooks will be interpreted if they are specified with only a simple
3905 regexp, instead of a matching pattern. The hooks are expanded when
3906 they are declared, so a hook will be interpreted according to the
3907 value of this variable at the time the hook is declared. The default
3908 value matches if the message is either from a user matching the
3909 regular expression given, or if it is from you (if the from address
3910 matches ``alternates'') and is to or cc'ed to a user matching the
3911 given regular expression.
3913 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b38
\b8.
\b. d
\bde
\bel
\ble
\bet
\bte
\be
3918 Controls whether or not messages are really deleted when closing or
3919 synchronizing a mailbox. If set to _
\by_
\be_
\bs, messages marked for deleting
3920 will automatically be purged without prompting. If set to _
\bn_
\bo,
3921 messages marked for deletion will be kept in the mailbox.
3923 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.3
\b39
\b9.
\b. d
\bde
\bel
\ble
\bet
\bte
\be_
\b_u
\bun
\bnt
\bta
\bag
\bg
3928 If this option is _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, mutt will untag messages when marking them for
3929 deletion. This applies when you either explicitly delete a message,
3930 or when you save it to another folder.
3932 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b40
\b0.
\b. d
\bdi
\big
\bge
\bes
\bst
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bol
\bll
\bla
\bap
\bps
\bse
\be
3937 If this option is _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, mutt's revattach menu will not show the
3938 subparts of individual messages in a digest. To see these subparts,
3939 press 'v' on that menu.
3941 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b41
\b1.
\b. d
\bdi
\bis
\bsp
\bpl
\bla
\bay
\by_
\b_f
\bfi
\bil
\blt
\bte
\ber
\br
3946 When set, specifies a command used to filter messages. When a message
3947 is viewed it is passed as standard input to ``$display_filter'', and
3948 the filtered message is read from the standard output.
3950 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b42
\b2.
\b. d
\bdo
\bot
\btl
\blo
\boc
\bck
\bk_
\b_p
\bpr
\bro
\bog
\bgr
\bra
\bam
\bm
3953 Default: "/usr/local/bin/mutt_dotlock"
3955 Contains the path of the mutt_dotlock (8) binary to be used by mutt.
3957 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b43
\b3.
\b. d
\bds
\bsn
\bn_
\b_n
\bno
\bot
\bti
\bif
\bfy
\by
3962 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: you should not enable this unless you are using Sendmail 8.8.x
3965 This variable sets the request for when notification is returned. The
3966 string consists of a comma separated list (no spaces!) of one or more
3967 of the following: _
\bn_
\be_
\bv_
\be_
\br, to never request notification, _
\bf_
\ba_
\bi_
\bl_
\bu_
\br_
\be, to
3968 request notification on transmission failure, _
\bd_
\be_
\bl_
\ba_
\by, to be notified of
3969 message delays, _
\bs_
\bu_
\bc_
\bc_
\be_
\bs_
\bs, to be notified of successful transmission.
3971 Example: set dsn_notify="failure,delay"
3973 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b44
\b4.
\b. d
\bds
\bsn
\bn_
\b_r
\bre
\bet
\btu
\bur
\brn
\bn
3978 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: you should not enable this unless you are using Sendmail 8.8.x
3981 This variable controls how much of your message is returned in DSN
3982 messages. It may be set to either _
\bh_
\bd_
\br_
\bs to return just the message
3983 header, or _
\bf_
\bu_
\bl_
\bl to return the full message.
3985 Example: set dsn_return=hdrs
3987 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b45
\b5.
\b. d
\bdu
\bup
\bpl
\bli
\bic
\bca
\bat
\bte
\be_
\b_t
\bth
\bhr
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bds
\bs
3992 This variable controls whether mutt, when sorting by threads, threads
3993 messages with the same message-id together. If it is set, it will
3994 indicate that it thinks they are duplicates of each other with an
3995 equals sign in the thread diagram.
3997 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b46
\b6.
\b. e
\bed
\bdi
\bit
\bt_
\b_h
\bhe
\bea
\bad
\bde
\ber
\brs
\bs
4002 This option allows you to edit the header of your outgoing messages
4003 along with the body of your message.
4005 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b47
\b7.
\b. e
\bed
\bdi
\bit
\bto
\bor
\br
4010 This variable specifies which editor is used by mutt. It defaults to
4011 the value of the VISUAL, or EDITOR, environment variable, or to the
4012 string "vi" if neither of those are set.
4014 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b48
\b8.
\b. e
\ben
\bnc
\bco
\bod
\bde
\be_
\b_f
\bfr
\bro
\bom
\bm
4019 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, mutt will quoted-printable encode messages when they contain
4020 the string "From " in the beginning of a line. Useful to avoid the
4021 tampering certain mail delivery and transport agents tend to do with
4024 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.4
\b49
\b9.
\b. e
\ben
\bnv
\bve
\bel
\blo
\bop
\bpe
\be_
\b_f
\bfr
\bro
\bom
\bm
4029 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, mutt will try to derive the message's _
\be_
\bn_
\bv_
\be_
\bl_
\bo_
\bp_
\be sender from
4030 the "From:" header. Note that this information is passed to sendmail
4031 command using the "-f" command line switch, so don't set this option
4032 if you are using that switch in ``$sendmail'' yourself, or if the
4033 sendmail on your machine doesn't support that command line switch.
4035 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b50
\b0.
\b. e
\bes
\bsc
\bca
\bap
\bpe
\be
4040 Escape character to use for functions in the builtin editor.
4042 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b51
\b1.
\b. f
\bfa
\bas
\bst
\bt_
\b_r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bly
\by
4047 When set, the initial prompt for recipients and subject are skipped
4048 when replying to messages, and the initial prompt for subject is
4049 skipped when forwarding messages.
4051 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: this variable has no effect when the ````$autoedit'''' variable
4054 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b52
\b2.
\b. f
\bfc
\bcc
\bc_
\b_a
\bat
\btt
\bta
\bac
\bch
\bh
4059 This variable controls whether or not attachments on outgoing messages
4060 are saved along with the main body of your message.
4062 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b53
\b3.
\b. f
\bfc
\bcc
\bc_
\b_c
\bcl
\ble
\bea
\bar
\br
4067 When this variable is set, FCCs will be stored unencrypted and
4068 unsigned, even when the actual message is encrypted and/or signed.
4071 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b54
\b4.
\b. f
\bfo
\bol
\bld
\bde
\ber
\br
4076 Specifies the default location of your mailboxes. A `+' or `=' at the
4077 beginning of a pathname will be expanded to the value of this
4078 variable. Note that if you change this variable from the default
4079 value you need to make sure that the assignment occurs _
\bb_
\be_
\bf_
\bo_
\br_
\be you use
4080 `+' or `=' for any other variables since expansion takes place during
4083 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b55
\b5.
\b. f
\bfo
\bol
\bld
\bde
\ber
\br_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
4086 Default: "%2C %t %N %F %2l %-8.8u %-8.8g %8s %d %f"
4088 This variable allows you to customize the file browser display to your
4089 personal taste. This string is similar to ````$index_format'''', but
4090 has its own set of printf()-like sequences:
4092 %
\b%C
\bC current file number
4094 %
\b%d
\bd date/time folder was last modified
4098 %
\b%F
\bF file permissions
4100 %
\b%g
\bg group name (or numeric gid, if missing)
4102 %
\b%l
\bl number of hard links
4104 %
\b%N
\bN N if folder has new mail, blank otherwise
4106 %
\b%s
\bs size in bytes
4108 %
\b%t
\bt * if the file is tagged, blank otherwise
4110 %
\b%u
\bu owner name (or numeric uid, if missing)
4113 right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
4116 pad to the end of the line with character "X"
4118 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b56
\b6.
\b. f
\bfo
\bol
\bll
\blo
\bow
\bwu
\bup
\bp_
\b_t
\bto
\bo
4123 Controls whether or not the _
\bM_
\ba_
\bi_
\bl_
\b-_
\bF_
\bo_
\bl_
\bl_
\bo_
\bw_
\bu_
\bp_
\b-_
\bT_
\bo header field is generated
4124 when sending mail. When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will generate this field when you
4125 are replying to a known mailing list, specified with the ``subscribe''
4126 or ````lists'''' commands.
4128 This field has two purposes. First, preventing you from receiving
4129 duplicate copies of replies to messages which you send to mailing
4130 lists, and second, ensuring that you do get a reply separately for any
4131 messages sent to known lists to which you are not subscribed. The
4132 header will contain only the list's address for subscribed lists, and
4133 both the list address and your own email address for unsubscribed
4134 lists. Without this header, a group reply to your message sent to a
4135 subscribed list will be sent to both the list and your address,
4136 resulting in two copies of the same email for you.
4138 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b57
\b7.
\b. f
\bfo
\bol
\bll
\blo
\bow
\bwu
\bup
\bp_
\b_t
\bto
\bo_
\b_p
\bpo
\bos
\bst
\bte
\ber
\br
4143 If this variable is _
\bs_
\be_
\bt and the keyword "poster" is present in
4144 _
\bF_
\bo_
\bl_
\bl_
\bo_
\bw_
\bu_
\bp_
\b-_
\bT_
\bo header, follow-up to newsgroup function is not permitted.
4145 The message will be mailed to the submitter of the message via mail.
4147 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b58
\b8.
\b. f
\bfo
\bor
\brc
\bce
\be_
\b_n
\bna
\bam
\bme
\be
4152 This variable is similar to ````$save_name'''', except that Mutt will
4153 store a copy of your outgoing message by the username of the address
4154 you are sending to even if that mailbox does not exist.
4156 Also see the ````$record'''' variable.
4158 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.5
\b59
\b9.
\b. f
\bfo
\bor
\brw
\bwa
\bar
\brd
\bd_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bco
\bod
\bde
\be
4163 Controls the decoding of complex MIME messages into text/plain when
4164 forwarding a message. The message header is also RFC2047 decoded.
4165 This variable is only used, if ````$mime_forward'''' is _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt,
4166 otherwise ````$mime_forward_decode'''' is used instead.
4168 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b60
\b0.
\b. f
\bfo
\bor
\brw
\bwa
\bar
\brd
\bd_
\b_e
\bed
\bdi
\bit
\bt
4173 This quadoption controls whether or not the user is automatically
4174 placed in the editor when forwarding messages. For those who always
4175 want to forward with no modification, use a setting of ``no''.
4177 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b61
\b1.
\b. f
\bfo
\bor
\brw
\bwa
\bar
\brd
\bd_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
4182 This variable controls the default subject when forwarding a message.
4183 It uses the same format sequences as the ````$index_format''''
4186 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b62
\b2.
\b. f
\bfo
\bor
\brw
\bwa
\bar
\brd
\bd_
\b_q
\bqu
\buo
\bot
\bte
\be
4191 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt forwarded messages included in the main body of the message
4192 (when ````$mime_forward'''' is _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt) will be quoted using
4193 ````$indent_string''''.
4195 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b63
\b3.
\b. f
\bfr
\bro
\bom
\bm
4197 Type: e-mail address
4200 When set, this variable contains a default from address. It can be
4201 overridden using my_hdr (including from send-hooks) and
4202 ````$reverse_name''''. This variable is ignored if ````$use_from''''
4205 Defaults to the contents of the environment variable EMAIL.
4207 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b64
\b4.
\b. g
\bge
\bec
\bco
\bos
\bs_
\b_m
\bma
\bas
\bsk
\bk
4209 Type: regular expression
4212 A regular expression used by mutt to parse the GECOS field of a
4213 password entry when expanding the alias. By default the regular
4214 expression is set to "^[^,]*" which will return the string up to the
4215 first "," encountered. If the GECOS field contains a string like
4216 "lastname, firstname" then you should set the gecos_mask=".*".
4218 This can be useful if you see the following behavior: you address a e-
4219 mail to user ID stevef whose full name is Steve Franklin. If mutt
4220 expands stevef to "Franklin" stevef@foo.bar then you should set the
4221 gecos_mask to a regular expression that will match the whole name so
4222 mutt will expand "Franklin" to "Franklin, Steve".
4224 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b65
\b5.
\b. g
\bgr
\bro
\bou
\bup
\bp_
\b_i
\bin
\bnd
\bde
\bex
\bx_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
4227 Default: "%4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d"
4229 This variable allows you to customize the newsgroup browser display to
4230 your personal taste. This string is similar to ````index_format'''',
4231 but has its own set of printf()-like sequences:
4233 %C current newsgroup number
4234 %d description of newsgroup (becomes from server)
4236 %M - if newsgroup not allowed for direct post (moderated for example)
4237 %N N if newsgroup is new, u if unsubscribed, blank otherwise
4238 %n number of new articles in newsgroup
4239 %s number of unread articles in newsgroup
4240 %>X right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
4241 %|X pad to the end of the line with character "X"
4243 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b66
\b6.
\b. h
\bhd
\bdr
\brs
\bs
4248 When unset, the header fields normally added by the ````my_hdr''''
4249 command are not created. This variable _
\bm_
\bu_
\bs_
\bt be unset before composing
4250 a new message or replying in order to take effect. If set, the user
4251 defined header fields are added to every new message.
4253 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b67
\b7.
\b. h
\bhe
\bea
\bad
\bde
\ber
\br
4258 When set, this variable causes Mutt to include the header of the
4259 message you are replying to into the edit buffer. The ````$weed''''
4262 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b68
\b8.
\b. h
\bhe
\bel
\blp
\bp
4267 When set, help lines describing the bindings for the major functions
4268 provided by each menu are displayed on the first line of the screen.
4270 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: The binding will not be displayed correctly if the function is
4271 bound to a sequence rather than a single keystroke. Also, the help
4272 line may not be updated if a binding is changed while Mutt is running.
4273 Since this variable is primarily aimed at new users, neither of these
4274 should present a major problem.
4276 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.6
\b69
\b9.
\b. h
\bhi
\bid
\bdd
\bde
\ben
\bn_
\b_h
\bho
\bos
\bst
\bt
4281 When set, mutt will skip the host name part of ````$hostname''''
4282 variable when adding the domain part to addresses. This variable does
4283 not affect the generation of Message-IDs, and it will not lead to the
4284 cut-off of first-level domains.
4285 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b70
\b0.
\b. h
\bhi
\bid
\bde
\be_
\b_l
\bli
\bim
\bmi
\bit
\bte
\bed
\bd
4290 When set, mutt will not show the presence of messages that are hidden
4291 by limiting, in the thread tree.
4293 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b71
\b1.
\b. h
\bhi
\bid
\bde
\be_
\b_m
\bmi
\bis
\bss
\bsi
\bin
\bng
\bg
4298 When set, mutt will not show the presence of missing messages in the
4301 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b72
\b2.
\b. h
\bhi
\bid
\bde
\be_
\b_t
\bto
\bop
\bp_
\b_l
\bli
\bim
\bmi
\bit
\bte
\bed
\bd
4306 When set, mutt will not show the presence of messages that are hidden
4307 by limiting, at the top of threads in the thread tree. Note that when
4308 ``$hide_missing'' is set, this option will have no effect.
4310 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b73
\b3.
\b. h
\bhi
\bid
\bde
\be_
\b_t
\bto
\bop
\bp_
\b_m
\bmi
\bis
\bss
\bsi
\bin
\bng
\bg
4315 When set, mutt will not show the presence of missing messages at the
4316 top of threads in the thread tree. Note that when ``$hide_limited''
4317 is set, this option will have no effect.
4319 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b74
\b4.
\b. h
\bhi
\bis
\bst
\bto
\bor
\bry
\by
4324 This variable controls the size (in number of strings remembered) of
4325 the string history buffer. The buffer is cleared each time the
4328 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b75
\b5.
\b. h
\bho
\bon
\bno
\bor
\br_
\b_f
\bfo
\bol
\bll
\blo
\bow
\bwu
\bup
\bp_
\b_t
\bto
\bo
4333 This variable controls whether or not a Mail-Followup-To header is
4334 honored when group-replying to a message.
4335 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b76
\b6.
\b. h
\bho
\bos
\bst
\btn
\bna
\bam
\bme
\be
4340 Specifies the hostname to use after the ``@'' in local e-mail
4341 addresses. This overrides the compile time definition obtained from
4344 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b77
\b7.
\b. i
\big
\bgn
\bno
\bor
\bre
\be_
\b_l
\bli
\bis
\bst
\bt_
\b_r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bly
\by_
\b_t
\bto
\bo
4349 Affects the behaviour of the _
\br_
\be_
\bp_
\bl_
\by function when replying to messages
4350 from mailing lists. When set, if the ``Reply-To:'' field is set to
4351 the same value as the ``To:'' field, Mutt assumes that the ``Reply-
4352 To:'' field was set by the mailing list to automate responses to the
4353 list, and will ignore this field. To direct a response to the mailing
4354 list when this option is set, use the _
\bl_
\bi_
\bs_
\bt_
\b-_
\br_
\be_
\bp_
\bl_
\by function; _
\bg_
\br_
\bo_
\bu_
\bp_
\b-_
\br_
\be_
\bp_
\bl_
\by
4355 will reply to both the sender and the list.
4357 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b78
\b8.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bth
\bhe
\ben
\bnt
\bti
\bic
\bca
\bat
\bto
\bor
\brs
\bs
4362 This is a colon-delimited list of authentication methods mutt may
4363 attempt to use to log in to an IMAP server, in the order mutt should
4364 try them. Authentication methods are either 'login' or the right side
4365 of an IMAP 'AUTH=xxx' capability string, eg 'digest-md5', parameter is
4366 unset (the default) mutt will try all available methods, in order from
4367 most-secure to least-secure.
4369 Example: set imap_authenticators="gssapi:cram-md5:login"
4371 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: Mutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the
4372 previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but
4373 authentication fails, mutt will not connect to the IMAP server.
4375 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.7
\b79
\b9.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_d
\bde
\bel
\bli
\bim
\bm_
\b_c
\bch
\bha
\bar
\brs
\bs
4380 This contains the list of characters which you would like to treat as
4381 folder separators for displaying IMAP paths. In particular it helps in
4382 using the '=' shortcut for your _
\bf_
\bo_
\bl_
\bd_
\be_
\br variable.
4384 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b80
\b0.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brc
\bce
\be_
\b_s
\bss
\bsl
\bl
4389 If this variable is set, Mutt will always use SSL when connecting to
4392 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b81
\b1.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_h
\bho
\bom
\bme
\be_
\b_n
\bna
\bam
\bme
\bes
\bsp
\bpa
\bac
\bce
\be
4397 You normally want to see your personal folders alongside your INBOX in
4398 the IMAP browser. If you see something else, you may set this variable
4399 to the IMAP path to your folders.
4401 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b82
\b2.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_k
\bke
\bee
\bep
\bpa
\bal
\bli
\biv
\bve
\be
4406 This variable specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that
4407 mutt will wait before polling open IMAP connections, to prevent the
4408 server from closing them before mutt has finished with them. The
4409 default is well within the RFC-specified minimum amount of time (30
4410 minutes) before a server is allowed to do this, but in practice the
4411 RFC does get violated every now and then. Reduce this number if you
4412 find yourself getting disconnected from your IMAP server due to
4415 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b83
\b3.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_l
\bli
\bis
\bst
\bt_
\b_s
\bsu
\bub
\bbs
\bsc
\bcr
\bri
\bib
\bbe
\bed
\bd
4420 This variable configures whether IMAP folder browsing will look for
4421 only subscribed folders or all folders. This can be toggled in the
4422 IMAP browser with the _
\bt_
\bo_
\bg_
\bg_
\bl_
\be_
\b-_
\bs_
\bu_
\bb_
\bs_
\bc_
\br_
\bi_
\bb_
\be_
\bd function.
4424 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b84
\b4.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_p
\bpa
\bas
\bss
\bs
4429 Specifies the password for your IMAP account. If unset, Mutt will
4430 prompt you for your password when you invoke the fetch-mail function.
4431 W
\bWa
\bar
\brn
\bni
\bin
\bng
\bg: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly
4432 secure machine, because the superuser can read your muttrc even if you
4433 are the only one who can read the file.
4435 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b85
\b5.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_p
\bpa
\bas
\bss
\bsi
\biv
\bve
\be
4440 When set, mutt will not open new IMAP connections to check for new
4441 mail. Mutt will only check for new mail over existing IMAP
4442 connections. This is useful if you don't want to be prompted to
4443 user/password pairs on mutt invocation, or if opening the connection
4446 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b86
\b6.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_p
\bpe
\bee
\bek
\bk
4451 If set, mutt will avoid implicitly marking your mail as read whenever
4452 you fetch a message from the server. This is generally a good thing,
4453 but can make closing an IMAP folder somewhat slower. This option
4454 exists to appease speed freaks.
4456 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b87
\b7.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_s
\bse
\ber
\brv
\bve
\ber
\brn
\bno
\boi
\bis
\bse
\be
4461 When set, mutt will display warning messages from the IMAP server as
4462 error messages. Since these messages are often harmless, or generated
4463 due to configuration problems on the server which are out of the
4464 users' hands, you may wish to suppress them at some point.
4466 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b88
\b8.
\b. i
\bim
\bma
\bap
\bp_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\ber
\br
4471 Your login name on the IMAP server.
4473 This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.
4475 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.8
\b89
\b9.
\b. i
\bim
\bmp
\bpl
\bli
\bic
\bci
\bit
\bt_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bto
\bov
\bvi
\bie
\bew
\bw
4480 If set to ``yes'', mutt will look for a mailcap entry with the
4481 copiousoutput flag set for _
\be_
\bv_
\be_
\br_
\by MIME attachment it doesn't have an
4482 internal viewer defined for. If such an entry is found, mutt will use
4483 the viewer defined in that entry to convert the body part to text
4486 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b90
\b0.
\b. i
\bin
\bnc
\bcl
\blu
\bud
\bde
\be
4491 Controls whether or not a copy of the message(s) you are replying to
4492 is included in your reply.
4494 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b91
\b1.
\b. i
\bin
\bnd
\bde
\ben
\bnt
\bt_
\b_s
\bst
\btr
\bri
\bin
\bng
\bg
4499 Specifies the string to prepend to each line of text quoted in a
4500 message to which you are replying. You are strongly encouraged not to
4501 change this value, as it tends to agitate the more fanatical netizens.
4503 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b92
\b2.
\b. i
\bin
\bnd
\bde
\bex
\bx_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
4506 Default: "%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%?l?%4l&%4c?) %s"
4508 This variable allows you to customize the message index display to
4509 your personal taste.
4511 ``Format strings'' are similar to the strings used in the ``C''
4512 function printf to format output (see the man page for more detail).
4513 The following sequences are defined in Mutt:
4515 %
\b%a
\ba address of the author
4517 %
\b%A
\bA reply-to address (if present; otherwise: address of author)
4519 %
\b%b
\bb filename of the original message folder (think mailBox)
4521 %
\b%B
\bB the list to which the letter was sent, or else the folder name
4524 %
\b%c
\bc number of characters (bytes) in the message
4526 %
\b%C
\bC current message number
4528 %
\b%d
\bd date and time of the message in the format specified by
4529 ``date_format'' converted to sender's time zone
4531 %
\b%D
\bD date and time of the message in the format specified by
4532 ``date_format'' converted to the local time zone
4534 %
\b%e
\be current message number in thread
4536 %
\b%E
\bE number of messages in current thread
4538 %
\b%f
\bf entire From: line (address + real name)
4540 %
\b%F
\bF author name, or recipient name if the message is from you
4542 %
\b%g
\bg newsgroup name (if compiled with nntp support)
4544 %
\b%i
\bi message-id of the current message
4546 %
\b%l
\bl number of lines in the message (does not work with maildir, mh,
4547 and possibly IMAP folders)
4549 %
\b%L
\bL If an address in the To or CC header field matches an address
4550 defined by the users ``subscribe'' command, this displays "To
4551 <list-name>", otherwise the same as %F.
4553 %
\b%m
\bm total number of message in the mailbox
4555 %
\b%M
\bM number of hidden messages if the thread is collapsed.
4557 %
\b%N
\bN message score
4559 %
\b%n
\bn author's real name (or address if missing)
4561 %
\b%O
\bO (_O_riginal save folder) Where mutt would formerly have stashed
4562 the message: list name or recipient name if no list
4564 %
\b%s
\bs subject of the message
4566 %
\b%S
\bS status of the message (N/D/d/!/r/*)
4568 %
\b%t
\bt `to:' field (recipients)
4570 %
\b%T
\bT the appropriate character from the ``$to_chars'' string
4572 %
\b%u
\bu user (login) name of the author
4574 %
\b%v
\bv first name of the author, or the recipient if the message is
4577 %
\b%W
\bW name of organization of author (`organization:' field)
4579 %
\b%y
\by `x-label:' field, if present
4581 %
\b%Y
\bY `x-label' field, if present, and (1) not at part of a thread
4582 tree, (2) at the top of a thread, or (3) `x-label' is different
4583 from preceding message's `x-label'.
4585 %
\b%Z
\bZ message status flags
4587 %
\b%{
\b{f
\bfm
\bmt
\bt}
\b}
4588 the date and time of the message is converted to sender's time
4589 zone, and ``fmt'' is expanded by the library function
4590 ``strftime''; a leading bang disables locales
4592 %
\b%[
\b[f
\bfm
\bmt
\bt]
\b]
4593 the date and time of the message is converted to the local time
4594 zone, and ``fmt'' is expanded by the library function
4595 ``strftime''; a leading bang disables locales
4597 %
\b%(
\b(f
\bfm
\bmt
\bt)
\b)
4598 the local date and time when the message was received. ``fmt''
4599 is expanded by the library function ``strftime''; a leading bang
4602 %
\b%<
\b<f
\bfm
\bmt
\bt>
\b>
4603 the current local time. ``fmt'' is expanded by the library
4604 function ``strftime''; a leading bang disables locales.
4607 right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
4610 pad to the end of the line with character "X"
4612 See also: ````$to_chars''''.
4614 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b93
\b3.
\b. i
\bin
\bne
\bew
\bws
\bs
4619 If set, specifies the program and arguments used to deliver news
4620 posted by Mutt. Otherwise, mutt posts article using current
4621 connection to news server. The following printf-style sequence is
4626 Example: set inews="/usr/local/bin/inews -hS"
4628 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b94
\b4.
\b. i
\bis
\bsp
\bpe
\bel
\bll
\bl
4631 Default: "/usr/bin/ispell"
4633 How to invoke ispell (GNU's spell-checking software).
4635 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b95
\b5.
\b. k
\bke
\bee
\bep
\bp_
\b_f
\bfl
\bla
\bag
\bgg
\bge
\bed
\bd
4640 If set, read messages marked as flagged will not be moved from your
4641 spool mailbox to your ````$mbox'''' mailbox, or as a result of a
4642 ````mbox-hook'''' command.
4644 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b96
\b6.
\b. l
\blo
\boc
\bca
\bal
\ble
\be
4649 The locale used by _
\bs_
\bt_
\br_
\bf_
\bt_
\bi_
\bm_
\be_
\b(_
\b3_
\b) to format dates. Legal values are the
4650 strings your system accepts for the locale variable _
\bL_
\bC_
\b__
\bT_
\bI_
\bM_
\bE.
4652 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b97
\b7.
\b. m
\bma
\bai
\bil
\bl_
\b_c
\bch
\bhe
\bec
\bck
\bk
4657 This variable configures how often (in seconds) mutt should look for
4660 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b98
\b8.
\b. m
\bma
\bai
\bil
\blc
\bca
\bap
\bp_
\b_p
\bpa
\bat
\bth
\bh
4665 This variable specifies which files to consult when attempting to
4666 display MIME bodies not directly supported by Mutt.
4668 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.9
\b99
\b9.
\b. m
\bma
\bai
\bil
\blc
\bca
\bap
\bp_
\b_s
\bsa
\ban
\bni
\bit
\bti
\biz
\bze
\be
4673 If set, mutt will restrict possible characters in mailcap % expandos
4674 to a well-defined set of safe characters. This is the safe setting,
4675 but we are not sure it doesn't break some more advanced MIME stuff.
4677 D
\bDO
\bON
\bN'
\b'T
\bT C
\bCH
\bHA
\bAN
\bNG
\bGE
\bE T
\bTH
\bHI
\bIS
\bS S
\bSE
\bET
\bTT
\bTI
\bIN
\bNG
\bG U
\bUN
\bNL
\bLE
\bES
\bSS
\bS Y
\bYO
\bOU
\bU A
\bAR
\bRE
\bE R
\bRE
\bEA
\bAL
\bLL
\bLY
\bY S
\bSU
\bUR
\bRE
\bE W
\bWH
\bHA
\bAT
\bT Y
\bYO
\bOU
\bU A
\bAR
\bRE
\bE
4678 D
\bDO
\bOI
\bIN
\bNG
\bG!
\b!
4680 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b00
\b0.
\b. m
\bma
\bai
\bil
\bld
\bdi
\bir
\br_
\b_t
\btr
\bra
\bas
\bsh
\bh
4685 If set, messages marked as deleted will be saved with the maildir
4686 (T)rashed flag instead of unlinked. N
\bNO
\bOT
\bTE
\bE:
\b: this only applies to
4687 maildir-style mailboxes. Setting it will have no effect on other
4690 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b01
\b1.
\b. m
\bma
\bar
\brk
\bk_
\b_o
\bol
\bld
\bd
4695 Controls whether or not mutt marks _
\bn_
\be_
\bw u
\bun
\bnr
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bd messages as _
\bo_
\bl_
\bd if you
4696 exit a mailbox without reading them. With this option set, the next
4697 time you start mutt, the messages will show up with an "O" next to
4698 them in the index menu, indicating that they are old.
4700 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b02
\b2.
\b. m
\bma
\bar
\brk
\bke
\ber
\brs
\bs
4705 Controls the display of wrapped lines in the internal pager. If set, a
4706 ``+'' marker is displayed at the beginning of wrapped lines. Also see
4707 the ````$smart_wrap'''' variable.
4709 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b03
\b3.
\b. m
\bma
\bas
\bsk
\bk
4711 Type: regular expression
4714 A regular expression used in the file browser, optionally preceded by
4715 the _
\bn_
\bo_
\bt operator ``!''. Only files whose names match this mask will
4716 be shown. The match is always case-sensitive.
4718 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b04
\b4.
\b. m
\bmb
\bbo
\box
\bx
4723 This specifies the folder into which read mail in your
4724 ````$spoolfile'''' folder will be appended.
4726 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b05
\b5.
\b. m
\bmb
\bbo
\box
\bx_
\b_t
\bty
\byp
\bpe
\be
4731 The default mailbox type used when creating new folders. May be any of
4732 mbox, MMDF, MH and Maildir.
4734 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b06
\b6.
\b. m
\bme
\bet
\bto
\boo
\bo
4739 If unset, Mutt will remove your address (see the ``alternates''
4740 command) from the list of recipients when replying to a message.
4742 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b07
\b7.
\b. m
\bme
\ben
\bnu
\bu_
\b_s
\bsc
\bcr
\bro
\bol
\bll
\bl
4747 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, menus will be scrolled up or down one line when you attempt
4748 to move across a screen boundary. If _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt, the screen is cleared and
4749 the next or previous page of the menu is displayed (useful for slow
4750 links to avoid many redraws).
4752 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b08
\b8.
\b. m
\bme
\bet
\bta
\ba_
\b_k
\bke
\bey
\by
4757 If set, forces Mutt to interpret keystrokes with the high bit (bit 8)
4758 set as if the user had pressed the ESC key and whatever key remains
4759 after having the high bit removed. For example, if the key pressed
4760 has an ASCII value of 0xf4, then this is treated as if the user had
4761 pressed ESC then ``x''. This is because the result of removing the
4762 high bit from ``0xf4'' is ``0x74'', which is the ASCII character
4765 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b10
\b09
\b9.
\b. m
\bmh
\bh_
\b_p
\bpu
\bur
\brg
\bge
\be
4770 When unset, mutt will mimic mh's behaviour and rename deleted messages
4771 to _
\b,_
\b<_
\bo_
\bl_
\bd _
\bf_
\bi_
\bl_
\be _
\bn_
\ba_
\bm_
\be_
\b> in mh folders instead of really deleting them. If
4772 the variable is set, the message files will simply be deleted.
4774 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b10
\b0.
\b. m
\bmh
\bh_
\b_s
\bse
\beq
\bq_
\b_f
\bfl
\bla
\bag
\bgg
\bge
\bed
\bd
4779 The name of the MH sequence used for flagged messages.
4781 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b11
\b1.
\b. m
\bmh
\bh_
\b_s
\bse
\beq
\bq_
\b_r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bli
\bie
\bed
\bd
4786 The name of the MH sequence used to tag replied messages.
4788 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b12
\b2.
\b. m
\bmh
\bh_
\b_s
\bse
\beq
\bq_
\b_u
\bun
\bns
\bse
\bee
\ben
\bn
4793 The name of the MH sequence used for unseen messages.
4795 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b13
\b3.
\b. m
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brw
\bwa
\bar
\brd
\bd
4800 When set, the message you are forwarding will be attached as a
4801 separate MIME part instead of included in the main body of the
4802 message. This is useful for forwarding MIME messages so the receiver
4803 can properly view the message as it was delivered to you. If you like
4804 to switch between MIME and not MIME from mail to mail, set this
4805 variable to ask-no or ask-yes.
4807 Also see ````$forward_decode'''' and ````$mime_forward_decode''''.
4809 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b14
\b4.
\b. m
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brw
\bwa
\bar
\brd
\bd_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bco
\bod
\bde
\be
4814 Controls the decoding of complex MIME messages into text/plain when
4815 forwarding a message while ````$mime_forward'''' is _
\bs_
\be_
\bt. Otherwise
4816 ````$forward_decode'''' is used instead.
4818 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b15
\b5.
\b. m
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brw
\bwa
\bar
\brd
\bd_
\b_r
\bre
\bes
\bst
\bt
4823 When forwarding multiple attachments of a MIME message from the
4824 recvattach menu, attachments which cannot be decoded in a reasonable
4825 manner will be attached to the newly composed message if this option
4828 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b16
\b6.
\b. m
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_s
\bsu
\bub
\bbj
\bje
\bec
\bct
\bt
4833 If _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt, 8-bit ``subject:'' line in article header will not be
4834 encoded according to RFC2047 to base64. This is useful when message
4835 is Usenet article, because MIME for news is nonstandard feature.
4837 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b17
\b7.
\b. m
\bmi
\bix
\bx_
\b_e
\ben
\bnt
\btr
\bry
\by_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
4840 Default: "%4n %c %-16s %a"
4842 This variable describes the format of a remailer line on the mixmaster
4843 chain selection screen. The following printf-like sequences are
4846 %
\b%n
\bn The running number on the menu.
4848 %
\b%c
\bc Remailer capabilities.
4850 %
\b%s
\bs The remailer's short name.
4852 %
\b%a
\ba The remailer's e-mail address.
4854 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b18
\b8.
\b. m
\bmi
\bix
\bxm
\bma
\bas
\bst
\bte
\ber
\br
4857 Default: "mixmaster"
4859 This variable contains the path to the Mixmaster binary on your
4860 system. It is used with various sets of parameters to gather the list
4861 of known remailers, and to finally send a message through the
4864 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b11
\b19
\b9.
\b. m
\bmo
\bov
\bve
\be
4869 Controls whether you will be asked to confirm moving read messages
4870 from your spool mailbox to your ````$mbox'''' mailbox, or as a result
4871 of a ````mbox-hook'''' command.
4873 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b20
\b0.
\b. m
\bme
\bes
\bss
\bsa
\bag
\bge
\be_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
4878 This is the string displayed in the ``attachment'' menu for
4879 attachments of type message/rfc822. For a full listing of defined
4880 printf()-like sequences see the section on ````$index_format''''.
4882 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b21
\b1.
\b. n
\bna
\bar
\brr
\bro
\bow
\bw_
\b_t
\btr
\bre
\bee
\be
4887 This variable, when set, makes the thread tree narrower, allowing
4888 deeper threads to fit on the screen.
4890 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b22
\b2.
\b. n
\bne
\bew
\bws
\bs_
\b_c
\bca
\bac
\bch
\bhe
\be_
\b_d
\bdi
\bir
\br
4895 This variable pointing to directory where Mutt will save cached news
4896 articles headers in. If _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt, headers will not be saved at all and
4897 will be reloaded each time when you enter to newsgroup.
4899 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b23
\b3.
\b. n
\bne
\bew
\bws
\bs_
\b_s
\bse
\ber
\brv
\bve
\ber
\br
4904 This variable specifies domain name or address of NNTP server. It
4905 defaults to the newsserver specified in the environment variable
4906 $NNTPSERVER or contained in the file /etc/nntpserver. You can also
4907 specify username and an alternative port for each newsserver, ie:
4909 [nntp[s]://][username[:password]@]newsserver[:port]
4911 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b24
\b4.
\b. n
\bne
\bew
\bws
\bsr
\brc
\bc
4914 Default: "~/.newsrc"
4916 The file, containing info about subscribed newsgroups - names and
4917 indexes of read articles. The following printf-style sequence is
4922 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b25
\b5.
\b. n
\bnn
\bnt
\btp
\bp_
\b_c
\bco
\bon
\bnt
\bte
\bex
\bxt
\bt
4927 This variable defines number of articles which will be in index when
4928 newsgroup entered. If active newsgroup have more articles than this
4929 number, oldest articles will be ignored. Also controls how many
4930 articles headers will be saved in cache when you quit newsgroup.
4932 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b26
\b6.
\b. n
\bnn
\bnt
\btp
\bp_
\b_l
\blo
\boa
\bad
\bd_
\b_d
\bde
\bes
\bsc
\bcr
\bri
\bip
\bpt
\bti
\bio
\bon
\bn
4937 This variable controls whether or not descriptions for each newsgroup
4938 must be loaded when newsgroup is added to list (first time list
4939 loading or new newsgroup adding).
4941 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b27
\b7.
\b. n
\bnn
\bnt
\btp
\bp_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\ber
\br
4946 Your login name on the NNTP server. If _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt and NNTP server requires
4947 authentification, Mutt will prompt you for your account name when you
4948 connect to newsserver.
4950 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b28
\b8.
\b. n
\bnn
\bnt
\btp
\bp_
\b_p
\bpa
\bas
\bss
\bs
4955 Your password for NNTP account.
4957 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b12
\b29
\b9.
\b. n
\bnn
\bnt
\btp
\bp_
\b_p
\bpo
\bol
\bll
\bl
4962 The time in seconds until any operations on newsgroup except post new
4963 article will cause recheck for new news. If set to 0, Mutt will
4964 recheck newsgroup on each operation in index (stepping, read article,
4967 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b30
\b0.
\b. n
\bnn
\bnt
\btp
\bp_
\b_r
\bre
\bec
\bco
\bon
\bnn
\bne
\bec
\bct
\bt
4972 Controls whether or not Mutt will try to reconnect to newsserver when
4975 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b31
\b1.
\b. p
\bpa
\bag
\bge
\ber
\br
4980 This variable specifies which pager you would like to use to view
4981 messages. builtin means to use the builtin pager, otherwise this
4982 variable should specify the pathname of the external pager you would
4985 Using an external pager may have some disadvantages: Additional
4986 keystrokes are necessary because you can't call mutt functions
4987 directly from the pager, and screen resizes cause lines longer than
4988 the screen width to be badly formatted in the help menu.
4990 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b32
\b2.
\b. p
\bpa
\bag
\bge
\ber
\br_
\b_c
\bco
\bon
\bnt
\bte
\bex
\bxt
\bt
4995 This variable controls the number of lines of context that are given
4996 when displaying the next or previous page in the internal pager. By
4997 default, Mutt will display the line after the last one on the screen
4998 at the top of the next page (0 lines of context).
5000 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b33
\b3.
\b. p
\bpa
\bag
\bge
\ber
\br_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
5003 Default: "-%Z- %C/%m: %-20.20n %s"
5005 This variable controls the format of the one-line message ``status''
5006 displayed before each message in either the internal or an external
5007 pager. The valid sequences are listed in the ````$index_format''''
5010 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b34
\b4.
\b. p
\bpa
\bag
\bge
\ber
\br_
\b_i
\bin
\bnd
\bde
\bex
\bx_
\b_l
\bli
\bin
\bne
\bes
\bs
5015 Determines the number of lines of a mini-index which is shown when in
5016 the pager. The current message, unless near the top or bottom of the
5017 folder, will be roughly one third of the way down this mini-index,
5018 giving the reader the context of a few messages before and after the
5019 message. This is useful, for example, to determine how many messages
5020 remain to be read in the current thread. One of the lines is reserved
5021 for the status bar from the index, so a _
\bp_
\ba_
\bg_
\be_
\br_
\b__
\bi_
\bn_
\bd_
\be_
\bx_
\b__
\bl_
\bi_
\bn_
\be_
\bs of 6 will
5022 only show 5 lines of the actual index. A value of 0 results in no
5023 index being shown. If the number of messages in the current folder is
5024 less than _
\bp_
\ba_
\bg_
\be_
\br_
\b__
\bi_
\bn_
\bd_
\be_
\bx_
\b__
\bl_
\bi_
\bn_
\be_
\bs, then the index will only use as many
5027 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b35
\b5.
\b. p
\bpa
\bag
\bge
\ber
\br_
\b_s
\bst
\bto
\bop
\bp
5032 When set, the internal-pager will n
\bno
\bot
\bt move to the next message when
5033 you are at the end of a message and invoke the _
\bn_
\be_
\bx_
\bt_
\b-_
\bp_
\ba_
\bg_
\be function.
5035 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b36
\b6.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bto
\bos
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn
5040 Setting this variable will cause Mutt to always attempt to
5041 cryptographically sign outgoing messages. This can be overridden by
5042 use of the _
\bp_
\bg_
\bp_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bn_
\bu, when signing is not required or encryption is
5043 requested as well. If ````$smime_is_default'''' is set, then OpenSSL
5044 is used instead to create S/MIME messages and settings can be
5045 overridden by use of the _
\bs_
\bm_
\bi_
\bm_
\be_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bn_
\bu. (Crypto only)
5047 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b37
\b7.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bto
\boe
\ben
\bnc
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt
5052 Setting this variable will cause Mutt to always attempt to PGP encrypt
5053 outgoing messages. This is probably only useful in connection to the
5054 _
\bs_
\be_
\bn_
\bd_
\b-_
\bh_
\bo_
\bo_
\bk command. It can be overridden by use of the _
\bp_
\bg_
\bp_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bn_
\bu, when
5055 encryption is not required or signing is requested as well. IF
5056 ````$smime_is_default'''' is set, then OpenSSL is used instead to
5057 create S/MIME messages and settings can be overridden by use of the
5058 _
\bs_
\bm_
\bi_
\bm_
\be_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bn_
\bu. (Crypto only)
5059 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b38
\b8.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_i
\big
\bgn
\bno
\bor
\bre
\be_
\b_s
\bsu
\bub
\bbk
\bke
\bey
\bys
\bs
5064 Setting this variable will cause Mutt to ignore OpenPGP subkeys.
5065 Instead, the principal key will inherit the subkeys' capabilities.
5066 Unset this if you want to play interesting key selection games. (PGP
5069 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b13
\b39
\b9.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bly
\bye
\ben
\bnc
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt
5074 If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL encrypt replies to messages which
5075 are encrypted. (Crypto only)
5077 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b40
\b0.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bly
\bys
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn
5082 If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL sign replies to messages which
5085 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: this does not work on messages that are encrypted a
\ban
\bnd
\bd signed!
5088 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b41
\b1.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bly
\bys
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bne
\ben
\bnc
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bte
\bed
\bd
5093 If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL sign replies to messages which
5094 are encrypted. This makes sense in combination with
5095 ````$crypt_replyencrypt'''', because it allows you to sign all
5096 messages which are automatically encrypted. This works around the
5097 problem noted in ````$crypt_replysign'''', that mutt is not able to
5098 find out whether an encrypted message is also signed. (Crypto only)
5100 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b42
\b2.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_t
\bti
\bim
\bme
\bes
\bst
\bta
\bam
\bmp
\bp
5105 If set, mutt will include a time stamp in the lines surrounding PGP or
5106 S/MIME output, so spoofing such lines is more difficult. If you are
5107 using colors to mark these lines, and rely on these, you may unset
5108 this setting. (Crypto only)
5110 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b43
\b3.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_g
\bgp
\bpg
\bg_
\b_a
\bag
\bge
\ben
\bnt
\bt
5115 If set, mutt will use a possibly-running gpg-agent process. (PGP
5118 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b44
\b4.
\b. c
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_v
\bve
\ber
\bri
\bif
\bfy
\by_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bg
5123 If ``yes'', always attempt to verify PGP or S/MIME signatures. If
5124 ``ask'', ask whether or not to verify the signature. If ``no'', never
5125 attempt to verify cryptographic signatures. (Crypto only)
5127 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b45
\b5.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_i
\bis
\bs_
\b_d
\bde
\bef
\bfa
\bau
\bul
\blt
\bt
5132 The default behaviour of mutt is to use PGP on all auto-
5133 sign/encryption operations. To override and to use OpenSSL instead
5134 this must be set. However, this has no effect while replying, since
5135 mutt will automatically select the same application that was used to
5136 sign/encrypt the original message. (Note that this variable can be
5137 overridden by unsetting ``$crypt_autosmime''.) (S/MIME only)
5139 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b46
\b6.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_a
\bas
\bsk
\bk_
\b_c
\bce
\ber
\brt
\bt_
\b_l
\bla
\bab
\bbe
\bel
\bl
5144 This flag controls whether you want to be asked to enter a label for a
5145 certificate about to be added to the database or not. It is set by
5146 default. (S/MIME only)
5148 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b47
\b7.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_d
\bde
\bef
\bfa
\bau
\bul
\blt
\bt_
\b_k
\bke
\bey
\by
5153 If set (default) this tells mutt to use the default key for
5154 decryption. Otherwise, if manage multiple certificate-key-pairs, mutt
5155 will try to use the mailbox-address to determine the key to use. It
5156 will ask you to supply a key, if it can't find one. (S/MIME only)
5158 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b48
\b8.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_e
\ben
\bnt
\btr
\bry
\by_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
5161 Default: "%4n %t%f %4l/0x%k %-4a %2c %u"
5163 This variable allows you to customize the PGP key selection menu to
5164 your personal taste. This string is similar to ````$index_format'''',
5165 but has its own set of printf()-like sequences:
5179 %
\b%c
\bc capabilities
5181 %
\b%t
\bt trust/validity of the key-uid association
5183 %
\b%[
\b[<
\b<s
\bs>
\b>]
\b]
5184 date of the key where <s> is an strftime(3) expression
5188 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b14
\b49
\b9.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_g
\bgo
\boo
\bod
\bd_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn
5190 Type: regular expression
5193 If you assign a text to this variable, then a PGP signature is only
5194 considered verified if the output from ``$pgp_verify_command''
5195 contains the text. Use this variable if the exit code from the command
5196 is 0 even for bad signatures. (PGP only)
5198 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b50
\b0.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_c
\bch
\bhe
\bec
\bck
\bk_
\b_e
\bex
\bxi
\bit
\bt
5203 If set, mutt will check the exit code of the PGP subprocess when
5204 signing or encrypting. A non-zero exit code means that the subprocess
5207 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b51
\b1.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_l
\blo
\bon
\bng
\bg_
\b_i
\bid
\bds
\bs
5212 If set, use 64 bit PGP key IDs. Unset uses the normal 32 bit Key IDs.
5215 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b52
\b2.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_r
\bre
\bet
\bta
\bai
\bin
\bna
\bab
\bbl
\ble
\be_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bgs
\bs
5220 If set, signed and encrypted messages will consist of nested
5221 multipart/signed and multipart/encrypted body parts.
5223 This is useful for applications like encrypted and signed mailing
5224 lists, where the outer layer (multipart/encrypted) can be easily
5225 removed, while the inner multipart/signed part is retained. (PGP
5228 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b53
\b3.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_s
\bsh
\bho
\bow
\bw_
\b_u
\bun
\bnu
\bus
\bsa
\bab
\bbl
\ble
\be
5233 If set, mutt will display non-usable keys on the PGP key selection
5234 menu. This includes keys which have been revoked, have expired, or
5235 have been marked as ``disabled'' by the user. (PGP only)
5237 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b54
\b4.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn_
\b_a
\bas
\bs
5242 If you have more than one key pair, this option allows you to specify
5243 which of your private keys to use. It is recommended that you use the
5244 keyid form to specify your key (e.g., ``0x00112233''). (PGP only)
5246 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b55
\b5.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_s
\bst
\btr
\bri
\bic
\bct
\bt_
\b_e
\ben
\bnc
\bc
5251 If set, Mutt will automatically encode PGP/MIME signed messages as
5252 _
\bq_
\bu_
\bo_
\bt_
\be_
\bd_
\b-_
\bp_
\br_
\bi_
\bn_
\bt_
\ba_
\bb_
\bl_
\be. Please note that unsetting this variable may lead
5253 to problems with non-verifyable PGP signatures, so only change this if
5254 you know what you are doing. (PGP only)
5256 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b56
\b6.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_t
\bti
\bim
\bme
\beo
\bou
\but
\bt
5261 The number of seconds after which a cached passphrase will expire if
5262 not used. (PGP only)
5263 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b57
\b7.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_s
\bso
\bor
\brt
\bt_
\b_k
\bke
\bey
\bys
\bs
5268 Specifies how the entries in the `pgp keys' menu are sorted. The
5269 following are legal values:
5271 a
\bad
\bdd
\bdr
\bre
\bes
\bss
\bs
5272 sort alphabetically by user id
5274 k
\bke
\bey
\byi
\bid
\bd
5275 sort alphabetically by key id
5278 sort by key creation date
5280 t
\btr
\bru
\bus
\bst
\bt
5281 sort by the trust of the key
5283 If you prefer reverse order of the above values, prefix it with
5284 `reverse-'. (PGP only)
5286 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b58
\b8.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_c
\bcr
\bre
\bea
\bat
\bte
\be_
\b_t
\btr
\bra
\bad
\bdi
\bit
\bti
\bio
\bon
\bna
\bal
\bl
5291 This option controls whether Mutt generates old-style inline PGP
5292 encrypted or signed messages.
5294 Note that PGP/MIME will be used automatically for messages which have
5295 a character set different from us-ascii, or which consist of more than
5298 Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is s
\bst
\btr
\bro
\bon
\bng
\bgl
\bly
\by
5299 d
\bde
\bep
\bpr
\bre
\bec
\bca
\bat
\bte
\bed
\bd. (PGP only)
5301 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b15
\b59
\b9.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bto
\bo_
\b_t
\btr
\bra
\bad
\bdi
\bit
\bti
\bio
\bon
\bna
\bal
\bl
5306 This option causes Mutt to generate an old-style inline PGP encrypted
5307 or signed message when replying to an old-style message, and a
5308 PGP/MIME message when replying to a PGP/MIME message. Note that this
5309 option is only meaningful when using ````$crypt_replyencrypt'''',
5310 ````$crypt_replysign'''', or ````$crypt_replysignencrypted''''.
5312 Also note that PGP/MIME will be used automatically for messages which
5313 have a character set different from us-ascii, or which consist of more
5314 than a single MIME part.
5316 This option overrides ````$pgp_create_traditional'''' (PGP only)
5318 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b60
\b0.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bco
\bod
\bde
\be_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5323 This format strings specifies a command which is used to decode
5324 application/pgp attachments.
5326 The PGP command formats have their own set of printf-like sequences:
5328 %
\b%p
\bp Expands to PGPPASSFD=0 when a pass phrase is needed, to an empty
5329 string otherwise. Note: This may be used with a %? construct.
5331 %
\b%f
\bf Expands to the name of a file containing a message.
5333 %
\b%s
\bs Expands to the name of a file containing the signature part of a
5334 multipart/signed attachment when verifying it.
5336 %
\b%a
\ba The value of ``$pgp_sign_as''.
5338 %
\b%r
\br One or more key IDs.
5340 For examples on how to configure these formats for the various
5341 versions of PGP which are floating around, see the pgp*.rc and gpg.rc
5342 files in the samples/ subdirectory which has been installed on your
5343 system alongside the documentation. (PGP only)
5345 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b61
\b1.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_g
\bge
\bet
\btk
\bke
\bey
\bys
\bs_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5350 This command is invoked whenever mutt will need public key
5351 information. %r is the only printf-like sequence used with this
5354 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b62
\b2.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_v
\bve
\ber
\bri
\bif
\bfy
\by_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5359 This command is used to verify PGP signatures. (PGP only)
5361 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b63
\b3.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5366 This command is used to decrypt a PGP encrypted message. (PGP only)
5368 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b64
\b4.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_c
\bcl
\ble
\bea
\bar
\brs
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5373 This format is used to create a old-style "clearsigned" PGP message.
5374 Note that the use of this format is s
\bst
\btr
\bro
\bon
\bng
\bgl
\bly
\by d
\bde
\bep
\bpr
\bre
\bec
\bca
\bat
\bte
\bed
\bd. (PGP only)
5376 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b65
\b5.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5381 This command is used to create the detached PGP signature for a
5382 multipart/signed PGP/MIME body part. (PGP only)
5384 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b66
\b6.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_e
\ben
\bnc
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5389 This command is used to both sign and encrypt a body part. (PGP only)
5391 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b67
\b7.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_e
\ben
\bnc
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_o
\bon
\bnl
\bly
\by_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5396 This command is used to encrypt a body part without signing it. (PGP
5399 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b68
\b8.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_i
\bim
\bmp
\bpo
\bor
\brt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5404 This command is used to import a key from a message into the user's
5405 public key ring. (PGP only)
5407 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b16
\b69
\b9.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_e
\bex
\bxp
\bpo
\bor
\brt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5412 This command is used to export a public key from the user's key ring.
5415 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b70
\b0.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_v
\bve
\ber
\bri
\bif
\bfy
\by_
\b_k
\bke
\bey
\by_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5420 This command is used to verify key information from the key selection
5423 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b71
\b1.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_l
\bli
\bis
\bst
\bt_
\b_s
\bse
\bec
\bcr
\bri
\bin
\bng
\bg_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5428 This command is used to list the secret key ring's contents. The
5429 output format must be analogous to the one used by gpg --list-keys
5432 This format is also generated by the pgpring utility which comes with
5435 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b72
\b2.
\b. p
\bpg
\bgp
\bp_
\b_l
\bli
\bis
\bst
\bt_
\b_p
\bpu
\bub
\bbr
\bri
\bin
\bng
\bg_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5440 This command is used to list the public key ring's contents. The
5441 output format must be analogous to the one used by gpg --list-keys
5444 This format is also generated by the pgpring utility which comes with
5447 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b73
\b3.
\b. f
\bfo
\bor
\brw
\bwa
\bar
\brd
\bd_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt
5452 Controls the handling of encrypted messages when forwarding a message.
5453 When set, the outer layer of encryption is stripped off. This
5454 variable is only used if ````$mime_forward'''' is _
\bs_
\be_
\bt and
5455 ````$mime_forward_decode'''' is _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt. (PGP only)
5457 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b74
\b4.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_t
\bti
\bim
\bme
\beo
\bou
\but
\bt
5462 The number of seconds after which a cached passphrase will expire if
5463 not used. (S/MIME only)
5465 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b75
\b5.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_e
\ben
\bnc
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_w
\bwi
\bit
\bth
\bh
5470 This sets the algorithm that should be used for encryption. Valid
5471 choices are "des", "des3", "rc2-40", "rc2-64", "rc2-128". If unset
5472 "3des" (TripleDES) is used. (S/MIME only)
5474 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b76
\b6.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_k
\bke
\bey
\bys
\bs
5479 Since there is no pubring/secring as with PGP, mutt has to handle
5480 storage ad retrieval of keys/certs by itself. This is very basic right
5481 now, and stores keys and certificates in two different directories,
5482 both named as the hash-value retrieved from OpenSSL. There is an index
5483 file which contains mailbox-address keyid pair, and which can be
5484 manually edited. This one points to the location of the private keys.
5487 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b77
\b7.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_c
\bca
\ba_
\b_l
\blo
\boc
\bca
\bat
\bti
\bio
\bon
\bn
5492 This variable contains the name of either a directory, or a file which
5493 contains trusted certificates for use with OpenSSL. (S/MIME only)
5495 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b78
\b8.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_c
\bce
\ber
\brt
\bti
\bif
\bfi
\bic
\bca
\bat
\bte
\bes
\bs
5500 Since there is no pubring/secring as with PGP, mutt has to handle
5501 storage and retrieval of keys by itself. This is very basic right now,
5502 and keys and certificates are stored in two different directories,
5503 both named as the hash-value retrieved from OpenSSL. There is an index
5504 file which contains mailbox-address keyid pairs, and which can be
5505 manually edited. This one points to the location of the certificates.
5508 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b17
\b79
\b9.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5513 This format string specifies a command which is used to decrypt
5514 application/x-pkcs7-mime attachments.
5516 The OpenSSL command formats have their own set of printf-like
5517 sequences similar to PGP's:
5518 %
\b%f
\bf Expands to the name of a file containing a message.
5520 %
\b%s
\bs Expands to the name of a file containing the signature part of a
5521 multipart/signed attachment when verifying it.
5523 %
\b%k
\bk The key-pair specified with ``$smime_default_key''
5525 %
\b%c
\bc One or more certificate IDs.
5527 %
\b%a
\ba The algorithm used for encryption.
5529 %
\b%C
\bC CA location: Depending on whether ``$smime_ca_location'' points
5530 to a directory or file, this expands to "-CApath
5531 ``$smime_ca_location''" or "-CAfile ``$smime_ca_location''".
5533 For examples on how to configure these formats, see the smime.rc in
5534 the samples/ subdirectory which has been installed on your system
5535 alongside the documentation. (S/MIME only)
5537 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b80
\b0.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_v
\bve
\ber
\bri
\bif
\bfy
\by_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5542 This command is used to verify S/MIME signatures of type
5543 multipart/signed. (S/MIME only)
5545 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b81
\b1.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_v
\bve
\ber
\bri
\bif
\bfy
\by_
\b_o
\bop
\bpa
\baq
\bqu
\bue
\be_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5550 This command is used to verify S/MIME signatures of type
5551 application/x-pkcs7-mime. (S/MIME only)
5553 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b82
\b2.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5558 This command is used to created S/MIME signatures of type
5559 multipart/signed, which can be read by all mail clients. (S/MIME
5562 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b83
\b3.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bn_
\b_o
\bop
\bpa
\baq
\bqu
\bue
\be_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5567 This command is used to created S/MIME signatures of type
5568 application/x-pkcs7-signature, which can only be handled by mail
5569 clients supporting the S/MIME extension. (S/MIME only)
5571 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b84
\b4.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_e
\ben
\bnc
\bcr
\bry
\byp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5576 This command is used to create encrypted S/MIME messages. (S/MIME
5579 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b85
\b5.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_p
\bpk
\bk7
\b7o
\bou
\but
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5584 This command is used to extract PKCS7 structures of S/MIME signatures,
5585 in order to extract the public X509 certificate(s). (S/MIME only)
5587 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b86
\b6.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_g
\bge
\bet
\bt_
\b_c
\bce
\ber
\brt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5592 This command is used to extract X509 certificates from a PKCS7
5593 structure. (S/MIME only)
5595 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b87
\b7.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_g
\bge
\bet
\bt_
\b_s
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bne
\ber
\br_
\b_c
\bce
\ber
\brt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5600 This command is used to extract only the signers X509 certificate from
5601 a S/MIME signature, so that the certificate's owner may get compared
5602 to the email's (S/MIME only)
5604 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b88
\b8.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_i
\bim
\bmp
\bpo
\bor
\brt
\bt_
\b_c
\bce
\ber
\brt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5609 This command is used to import a certificate via smime_keys. (S/MIME
5612 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b18
\b89
\b9.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_g
\bge
\bet
\bt_
\b_c
\bce
\ber
\brt
\bt_
\b_e
\bem
\bma
\bai
\bil
\bl_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5617 This command is used to extract the mail address(es) used for storing
5618 X509 certificates, and for verification purposes (to check whether the
5619 certificate was issued for the sender's mailbox). (S/MIME only)
5621 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b90
\b0.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be_
\b_d
\bde
\bef
\bfa
\bau
\bul
\blt
\bt_
\b_k
\bke
\bey
\by
5626 This is the default key-pair to use for signing. This must be set to
5627 the keyid (the hash-value that OpenSSL generates) to work properly
5630 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b91
\b1.
\b. s
\bss
\bsl
\bl_
\b_s
\bst
\bta
\bar
\brt
\btt
\btl
\bls
\bs
5635 If set (the default), mutt will attempt to use STARTTLS on servers
5636 advertising the capability. When unset, mutt will not attempt to use
5637 STARTTLS regardless of the server's capabilities.
5639 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b92
\b2.
\b. c
\bce
\ber
\brt
\bti
\bif
\bfi
\bic
\bca
\bat
\bte
\be_
\b_f
\bfi
\bil
\ble
\be
5644 This variable specifies the file where the certificates you trust are
5645 saved. When an unknown certificate is encountered, you are asked if
5646 you accept it or not. If you accept it, the certificate can also be
5647 saved in this file and further connections are automatically accepted.
5649 You can also manually add CA certificates in this file. Any server
5650 certificate that is signed with one of these CA certificates are also
5651 automatically accepted.
5653 Example: set certificate_file=~/.mutt/certificates
5655 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b93
\b3.
\b. s
\bss
\bsl
\bl_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\bes
\bsy
\bys
\bst
\bte
\bem
\bmc
\bce
\ber
\brt
\bts
\bs
5660 If set to _
\by_
\be_
\bs, mutt will use CA certificates in the system-wide
5661 certificate store when checking if server certificate is signed by a
5664 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b94
\b4.
\b. e
\ben
\bnt
\btr
\bro
\bop
\bpy
\by_
\b_f
\bfi
\bil
\ble
\be
5669 The file which includes random data that is used to initialize SSL
5672 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b95
\b5.
\b. s
\bss
\bsl
\bl_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_s
\bss
\bsl
\blv
\bv2
\b2
5677 This variables specifies whether to attempt to use SSLv2 in the SSL
5678 authentication process.
5680 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b96
\b6.
\b. s
\bss
\bsl
\bl_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_s
\bss
\bsl
\blv
\bv3
\b3
5685 This variables specifies whether to attempt to use SSLv3 in the SSL
5686 authentication process.
5688 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b97
\b7.
\b. s
\bss
\bsl
\bl_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_t
\btl
\bls
\bsv
\bv1
\b1
5693 This variables specifies whether to attempt to use TLSv1 in the SSL
5694 authentication process.
5696 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b98
\b8.
\b. p
\bpi
\bip
\bpe
\be_
\b_s
\bsp
\bpl
\bli
\bit
\bt
5701 Used in connection with the _
\bp_
\bi_
\bp_
\be_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bs_
\bs_
\ba_
\bg_
\be command and the ``tag-
5702 prefix'' operator. If this variable is unset, when piping a list of
5703 tagged messages Mutt will concatenate the messages and will pipe them
5704 as a single folder. When set, Mutt will pipe the messages one by one.
5705 In both cases the messages are piped in the current sorted order, and
5706 the ````$pipe_sep'''' separator is added after each message.
5708 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.1
\b19
\b99
\b9.
\b. p
\bpi
\bip
\bpe
\be_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bco
\bod
\bde
\be
5713 Used in connection with the _
\bp_
\bi_
\bp_
\be_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bs_
\bs_
\ba_
\bg_
\be command. When unset, Mutt
5714 will pipe the messages without any preprocessing. When set, Mutt will
5715 weed headers and will attempt to PGP/MIME decode the messages first.
5717 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b00
\b0.
\b. p
\bpi
\bip
\bpe
\be_
\b_s
\bse
\bep
\bp
5722 The separator to add between messages when piping a list of tagged
5723 messages to an external Unix command.
5725 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b01
\b1.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bth
\bhe
\ben
\bnt
\bti
\bic
\bca
\bat
\bto
\bor
\brs
\bs
5730 This is a colon-delimited list of authentication methods mutt may
5731 attempt to use to log in to an POP server, in the order mutt should
5732 try them. Authentication methods are either 'user', 'apop' or any
5733 SASL mechanism, eg 'digest-md5', 'gssapi' or 'cram-md5'. This
5734 parameter is case-insensitive. If this parameter is unset (the
5735 default) mutt will try all available methods, in order from most-
5736 secure to least-secure.
5738 Example: set pop_authenticators="digest-md5:apop:user"
5740 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b02
\b2.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_a
\bau
\but
\bth
\bh_
\b_t
\btr
\bry
\by_
\b_a
\bal
\bll
\bl
5745 If set, Mutt will try all available methods. When unset, Mutt will
5746 only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods
5747 are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails,
5748 Mutt will not connect to the POP server.
5750 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b03
\b3.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_c
\bch
\bhe
\bec
\bck
\bki
\bin
\bnt
\bte
\ber
\brv
\bva
\bal
\bl
5755 This variable configures how often (in seconds) POP should look for
5758 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b04
\b4.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_d
\bde
\bel
\ble
\bet
\bte
\be
5763 If set, Mutt will delete successfully downloaded messages from the POP
5764 server when using the fetch-mail function. When unset, Mutt will
5765 download messages but also leave them on the POP server.
5767 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b05
\b5.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_h
\bho
\bos
\bst
\bt
5772 The name of your POP server for the fetch-mail function. You can also
5773 specify an alternative port, username and password, ie:
5775 [pop[s]://][username[:password]@]popserver[:port]
5777 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b06
\b6.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_l
\bla
\bas
\bst
\bt
5782 If this variable is set, mutt will try to use the "LAST" POP command
5783 for retrieving only unread messages from the POP server when using the
5784 fetch-mail function.
5786 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b07
\b7.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_r
\bre
\bec
\bco
\bon
\bnn
\bne
\bec
\bct
\bt
5791 Controls whether or not Mutt will try to reconnect to POP server when
5794 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b08
\b8.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_u
\bus
\bse
\ber
\br
5799 Your login name on the POP server.
5801 This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.
5803 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b20
\b09
\b9.
\b. p
\bpo
\bop
\bp_
\b_p
\bpa
\bas
\bss
\bs
5808 Specifies the password for your POP account. If unset, Mutt will
5809 prompt you for your password when you open POP mailbox. W
\bWa
\bar
\brn
\bni
\bin
\bng
\bg: you
5810 should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine,
5811 because the superuser can read your muttrc even if you are the only
5812 one who can read the file.
5814 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b10
\b0.
\b. p
\bpo
\bos
\bst
\bt_
\b_i
\bin
\bnd
\bde
\ben
\bnt
\bt_
\b_s
\bst
\btr
\bri
\bin
\bng
\bg
5819 Similar to the ````$attribution'''' variable, Mutt will append this
5820 string after the inclusion of a message which is being replied to.
5822 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b11
\b1.
\b. p
\bpo
\bos
\bst
\bt_
\b_m
\bmo
\bod
\bde
\ber
\bra
\bat
\bte
\bed
\bd
5827 If set to _
\by_
\be_
\bs, Mutt will post article to newsgroup that have not
5828 permissions to posting (e.g. moderated). N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: if newsserver does not
5829 support posting to that newsgroup or totally read-only, that posting
5830 will not have an effect.
5832 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b12
\b2.
\b. p
\bpo
\bos
\bst
\btp
\bpo
\bon
\bne
\be
5837 Controls whether or not messages are saved in the ````$postponed''''
5838 mailbox when you elect not to send immediately.
5840 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b13
\b3.
\b. p
\bpo
\bos
\bst
\btp
\bpo
\bon
\bne
\bed
\bd
5843 Default: "~/postponed"
5845 Mutt allows you to indefinitely ````postpone'' sending a message''
5846 which you are editing. When you choose to postpone a message, Mutt
5847 saves it in the mailbox specified by this variable. Also see the
5848 ````$postpone'''' variable.
5850 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b14
\b4.
\b. p
\bpr
\bre
\bec
\bco
\bon
\bnn
\bne
\bec
\bct
\bt
5855 If set, a shell command to be executed if mutt fails to establish a
5856 connection to the server. This is useful for setting up secure
5857 connections, e.g. with ssh(1). If the command returns a nonzero
5858 status, mutt gives up opening the server. Example:
5860 preconnect="ssh -f -q -L 1234:mailhost.net:143 mailhost.net sleep 20 <
5861 /dev/null > /dev/null"
5863 Mailbox 'foo' on mailhost.net can now be reached as
5864 '{localhost:1234}foo'.
5866 NOTE: For this example to work, you must be able to log in to the
5867 remote machine without having to enter a password.
5869 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b15
\b5.
\b. p
\bpr
\bri
\bin
\bnt
\bt
5874 Controls whether or not Mutt asks for confirmation before printing.
5875 This is useful for people (like me) who accidentally hit ``p'' often.
5877 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b16
\b6.
\b. p
\bpr
\bri
\bin
\bnt
\bt_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5882 This specifies the command pipe that should be used to print messages.
5884 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b17
\b7.
\b. p
\bpr
\bri
\bin
\bnt
\bt_
\b_d
\bde
\bec
\bco
\bod
\bde
\be
5889 Used in connection with the print-message command. If this option is
5890 set, the message is decoded before it is passed to the external
5891 command specified by ``$print_command''. If this option is unset, no
5892 processing will be applied to the message when printing it. The
5893 latter setting may be useful if you are using some advanced printer
5894 filter which is able to properly format e-mail messages for printing.
5896 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b18
\b8.
\b. p
\bpr
\bri
\bin
\bnt
\bt_
\b_s
\bsp
\bpl
\bli
\bit
\bt
5901 Used in connection with the print-message command. If this option is
5902 set, the command specified by ``$print_command'' is executed once for
5903 each message which is to be printed. If this option is unset, the
5904 command specified by ``$print_command'' is executed only once, and all
5905 the messages are concatenated, with a form feed as the message
5908 Those who use the e
\ben
\bns
\bsc
\bcr
\bri
\bip
\bpt
\bt(1) program's mail-printing mode will most
5909 likely want to set this option.
5911 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b21
\b19
\b9.
\b. p
\bpr
\bro
\bom
\bmp
\bpt
\bt_
\b_a
\baf
\bft
\bte
\ber
\br
5916 If you use an _
\be_
\bx_
\bt_
\be_
\br_
\bn_
\ba_
\bl ````$pager'''', setting this variable will
5917 cause Mutt to prompt you for a command when the pager exits rather
5918 than returning to the index menu. If unset, Mutt will return to the
5919 index menu when the external pager exits.
5921 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b20
\b0.
\b. q
\bqu
\bue
\ber
\bry
\by_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bma
\ban
\bnd
\bd
5926 This specifies the command that mutt will use to make external address
5927 queries. The string should contain a %s, which will be substituted
5928 with the query string the user types. See ````query'''' for more
5931 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b21
\b1.
\b. q
\bqu
\bui
\bit
\bt
5936 This variable controls whether ``quit'' and ``exit'' actually quit
5937 from mutt. If it set to yes, they do quit, if it is set to no, they
5938 have no effect, and if it is set to ask-yes or ask-no, you are
5939 prompted for confirmation when you try to quit.
5941 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b22
\b2.
\b. q
\bqu
\buo
\bot
\bte
\be_
\b_r
\bre
\beg
\bge
\bex
\bxp
\bp
5943 Type: regular expression
5944 Default: "^([ \t]*[|>:}#])+"
5946 A regular expression used in the internal-pager to determine quoted
5947 sections of text in the body of a message.
5949 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: In order to use the _
\bq_
\bu_
\bo_
\bt_
\be_
\bdx
\bx patterns in the internal pager, you
5950 need to set this to a regular expression that matches _
\be_
\bx_
\ba_
\bc_
\bt_
\bl_
\by the
5951 quote characters at the beginning of quoted lines.
5953 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b23
\b3.
\b. r
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bd_
\b_i
\bin
\bnc
\bc
5958 If set to a value greater than 0, Mutt will display which message it
5959 is currently on when reading a mailbox. The message is printed after
5960 _
\br_
\be_
\ba_
\bd_
\b__
\bi_
\bn_
\bc messages have been read (e.g., if set to 25, Mutt will print
5961 a message when it reads message 25, and then again when it gets to
5962 message 50). This variable is meant to indicate progress when reading
5963 large mailboxes which may take some time. When set to 0, only a
5964 single message will appear before the reading the mailbox.
5966 Also see the ````$write_inc'''' variable.
5968 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b24
\b4.
\b. r
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bd_
\b_o
\bon
\bnl
\bly
\by
5973 If set, all folders are opened in read-only mode.
5975 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b25
\b5.
\b. r
\bre
\bea
\bal
\bln
\bna
\bam
\bme
\be
5980 This variable specifies what "real" or "personal" name should be used
5981 when sending messages.
5983 By default, this is the GECOS field from /etc/passwd. Note that this
5984 variable will _
\bn_
\bo_
\bt be used when the user has set a real name in the
5987 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b26
\b6.
\b. r
\bre
\bec
\bca
\bal
\bll
\bl
5992 Controls whether or not you are prompted to recall postponed messages
5993 when composing a new message. Also see ````$postponed''''.
5995 Setting this variable to ``yes'' is not generally useful, and thus not
5998 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b27
\b7.
\b. r
\bre
\bec
\bco
\bor
\brd
\bd
6003 This specifies the file into which your outgoing messages should be
6004 appended. (This is meant as the primary method for saving a copy of
6005 your messages, but another way to do this is using the ````my_hdr''''
6006 command to create a _
\bB_
\bc_
\bc_
\b: field with your email address in it.)
6008 The value of _
\b`_
\b`_
\b$_
\br_
\be_
\bc_
\bo_
\br_
\bd_
\b'_
\b' is overridden by the ````$force_name'''' and
6009 ````$save_name'''' variables, and the ````fcc-hook'''' command.
6011 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b28
\b8.
\b. r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bly
\by_
\b_r
\bre
\beg
\bge
\bex
\bxp
\bp
6013 Type: regular expression
6014 Default: "^(re([\[0-9\]+])*|aw):[ \t]*"
6016 A regular expression used to recognize reply messages when threading
6017 and replying. The default value corresponds to the English "Re:" and
6020 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b22
\b29
\b9.
\b. r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bly
\by_
\b_s
\bse
\bel
\blf
\bf
6025 If unset and you are replying to a message sent by you, Mutt will
6026 assume that you want to reply to the recipients of that message rather
6028 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b30
\b0.
\b. r
\bre
\bep
\bpl
\bly
\by_
\b_t
\bto
\bo
6033 If set, Mutt will ask you if you want to use the address listed in the
6034 Reply-To: header field when replying to a message. If you answer no,
6035 it will use the address in the From: header field instead. This
6036 option is useful for reading a mailing list that sets the Reply-To:
6037 header field to the list address and you want to send a private
6038 message to the author of a message.
6040 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b31
\b1.
\b. r
\bre
\bes
\bso
\bol
\blv
\bve
\be
6045 When set, the cursor will be automatically advanced to the next
6046 (possibly undeleted) message whenever a command that modifies the
6047 current message is executed.
6049 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b32
\b2.
\b. r
\bre
\bev
\bve
\ber
\brs
\bse
\be_
\b_a
\bal
\bli
\bia
\bas
\bs
6054 This variable controls whether or not Mutt will display the "personal"
6055 name from your aliases in the index menu if it finds an alias that
6056 matches the message's sender. For example, if you have the following
6059 alias juser abd30425@somewhere.net (Joe User)
6061 and then you receive mail which contains the following header:
6063 From: abd30425@somewhere.net
6065 It would be displayed in the index menu as ``Joe User'' instead of
6066 ``abd30425@somewhere.net.'' This is useful when the person's e-mail
6067 address is not human friendly (like CompuServe addresses).
6069 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b33
\b3.
\b. r
\bre
\bev
\bve
\ber
\brs
\bse
\be_
\b_n
\bna
\bam
\bme
\be
6073 It may sometimes arrive that you receive mail to a certain machine,
6074 move the messages to another machine, and reply to some the messages
6075 from there. If this variable is set, the default _
\bF_
\br_
\bo_
\bm_
\b: line of the
6076 reply messages is built using the address where you received the
6077 messages you are replying to. If the variable is unset, the _
\bF_
\br_
\bo_
\bm_
\b:
6078 line will use your address on the current machine.
6080 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b34
\b4.
\b. r
\bre
\bev
\bve
\ber
\brs
\bse
\be_
\b_r
\bre
\bea
\bal
\bln
\bna
\bam
\bme
\be
6085 This variable fine-tunes the behaviour of the ``reverse_name''
6086 feature. When it is set, mutt will use the address from incoming
6087 messages as-is, possibly including eventual real names. When it is
6088 unset, mutt will override any such real names with the setting of the
6089 ``realname'' variable.
6091 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b35
\b5.
\b. r
\brf
\bfc
\bc2
\b20
\b04
\b47
\b7_
\b_p
\bpa
\bar
\bra
\bam
\bme
\bet
\bte
\ber
\brs
\bs
6096 When this variable is set, Mutt will decode RFC-2047-encoded MIME
6097 parameters. You want to set this variable when mutt suggests you to
6098 save attachments to files named like this:
6099 =?iso-8859-1?Q?file=5F=E4=5F991116=2Ezip?=
6101 When this variable is set interactively, the change doesn't have the
6102 desired effect before you have changed folders.
6104 Note that this use of RFC 2047's encoding is explicitly, prohibited by
6105 the standard, but nevertheless encountered in the wild. Also note
6106 that setting this parameter will _
\bn_
\bo_
\bt have the effect that mutt
6107 _
\bg_
\be_
\bn_
\be_
\br_
\ba_
\bt_
\be_
\bs this kind of encoding. Instead, mutt will unconditionally
6108 use the encoding specified in RFC 2231.
6110 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b36
\b6.
\b. s
\bsa
\bav
\bve
\be_
\b_a
\bad
\bdd
\bdr
\bre
\bes
\bss
\bs
6115 If set, mutt will take the sender's full address when choosing a
6116 default folder for saving a mail. If ````$save_name'''' or
6117 ````$force_name'''' is set too, the selection of the fcc folder will
6120 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b37
\b7.
\b. s
\bsa
\bav
\bve
\be_
\b_e
\bem
\bmp
\bpt
\bty
\by
6125 When unset, mailboxes which contain no saved messages will be removed
6126 when closed (the exception is ````$spoolfile'''' which is never
6127 removed). If set, mailboxes are never removed.
6129 N
\bNo
\bot
\bte
\be:
\b: This only applies to mbox and MMDF folders, Mutt does not delete
6130 MH and Maildir directories.
6132 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b38
\b8.
\b. s
\bsa
\bav
\bve
\be_
\b_n
\bna
\bam
\bme
\be
6137 This variable controls how copies of outgoing messages are saved.
6138 When set, a check is made to see if a mailbox specified by the
6139 recipient address exists (this is done by searching for a mailbox in
6140 the ````$folder'''' directory with the _
\bu_
\bs_
\be_
\br_
\bn_
\ba_
\bm_
\be part of the recipient
6141 address). If the mailbox exists, the outgoing message will be saved
6142 to that mailbox, otherwise the message is saved to the ````$record''''
6145 Also see the ````$force_name'''' variable.
6147 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b23
\b39
\b9.
\b. s
\bsc
\bco
\bor
\bre
\be
6152 When this variable is _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt, scoring is turned off. This can be
6153 useful to selectively disable scoring for certain folders when the
6154 ````$score_threshold_delete'''' variable and friends are used.
6156 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b40
\b0.
\b. s
\bsc
\bco
\bor
\bre
\be_
\b_t
\bth
\bhr
\bre
\bes
\bsh
\bho
\bol
\bld
\bd_
\b_d
\bde
\bel
\ble
\bet
\bte
\be
6161 Messages which have been assigned a score equal to or lower than the
6162 value of this variable are automatically marked for deletion by mutt.
6163 Since mutt scores are always greater than or equal to zero, the
6164 default setting of this variable will never mark a message for
6167 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b41
\b1.
\b. s
\bsc
\bco
\bor
\bre
\be_
\b_t
\bth
\bhr
\bre
\bes
\bsh
\bho
\bol
\bld
\bd_
\b_f
\bfl
\bla
\bag
\bg
6172 Messages which have been assigned a score greater than or equal to
6173 this variable's value are automatically marked "flagged".
6175 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b42
\b2.
\b. s
\bsc
\bco
\bor
\bre
\be_
\b_t
\bth
\bhr
\bre
\bes
\bsh
\bho
\bol
\bld
\bd_
\b_r
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bd
6179 Messages which have been assigned a score equal to or lower than the
6180 value of this variable are automatically marked as read by mutt.
6181 Since mutt scores are always greater than or equal to zero, the
6182 default setting of this variable will never mark a message read.
6184 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b43
\b3.
\b. s
\bse
\ben
\bnd
\bd_
\b_c
\bch
\bha
\bar
\brs
\bse
\bet
\bt
6187 Default: "us-ascii:iso-8859-1:utf-8"
6189 A list of character sets for outgoing messages. Mutt will use the
6190 first character set into which the text can be converted exactly. If
6191 your ````$charset'''' is not iso-8859-1 and recipients may not
6192 understand UTF-8, it is advisable to include in the list an
6193 appropriate widely used standard character set (such as iso-8859-2,
6194 koi8-r or iso-2022-jp) either instead of or after "iso-8859-1".
6196 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b44
\b4.
\b. s
\bse
\ben
\bnd
\bdm
\bma
\bai
\bil
\bl
6199 Default: "/usr/sbin/sendmail -oem -oi"
6201 Specifies the program and arguments used to deliver mail sent by Mutt.
6202 Mutt expects that the specified program interprets additional
6203 arguments as recipient addresses.
6205 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b45
\b5.
\b. s
\bse
\ben
\bnd
\bdm
\bma
\bai
\bil
\bl_
\b_w
\bwa
\bai
\bit
\bt
6210 Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the ````$sendmail''''
6211 process to finish before giving up and putting delivery in the
6213 Mutt interprets the value of this variable as follows:
6215 >
\b>0
\b0 number of seconds to wait for sendmail to finish before
6218 0
\b0 wait forever for sendmail to finish
6220 <
\b<0
\b0 always put sendmail in the background without waiting
6222 Note that if you specify a value other than 0, the output of the child
6223 process will be put in a temporary file. If there is some error, you
6224 will be informed as to where to find the output.
6226 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b46
\b6.
\b. s
\bsh
\bhe
\bel
\bll
\bl
6231 Command to use when spawning a subshell. By default, the user's login
6232 shell from /etc/passwd is used.
6234 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b47
\b7.
\b. s
\bsa
\bav
\bve
\be_
\b_u
\bun
\bns
\bsu
\bub
\bbs
\bsc
\bcr
\bri
\bib
\bbe
\bed
\bd
6239 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, info about unsubscribed newsgroups will be saved into
6240 ``newsrc'' file and into cache.
6242 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b48
\b8.
\b. s
\bsh
\bho
\bow
\bw_
\b_n
\bne
\bew
\bw_
\b_n
\bne
\bew
\bws
\bs
6247 If _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, newsserver will be asked for new newsgroups on entering the
6248 browser. Otherwise, it will be done only once for a newsserver. Also
6249 controls whether or not number of new articles of subscribed
6250 newsgroups will be then checked.
6252 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b24
\b49
\b9.
\b. s
\bsh
\bho
\bow
\bw_
\b_o
\bon
\bnl
\bly
\by_
\b_u
\bun
\bnr
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bd
6257 If _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, only subscribed newsgroups that contain unread articles will
6258 be displayed in browser.
6260 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b50
\b0.
\b. s
\bsi
\big
\bg_
\b_d
\bda
\bas
\bsh
\bhe
\bes
\bs
6265 If set, a line containing ``-- '' will be inserted before your
6266 ````$signature''''. It is s
\bst
\btr
\bro
\bon
\bng
\bgl
\bly
\by recommended that you not unset
6267 this variable unless your ``signature'' contains just your name. The
6268 reason for this is because many software packages use ``-- \n'' to
6269 detect your signature. For example, Mutt has the ability to highlight
6270 the signature in a different color in the builtin pager.
6272 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b51
\b1.
\b. s
\bsi
\big
\bg_
\b_o
\bon
\bn_
\b_t
\bto
\bop
\bp
6277 If set, the signature will be included before any quoted or forwarded
6278 text. It is s
\bst
\btr
\bro
\bon
\bng
\bgl
\bly
\by recommended that you do not set this variable
6279 unless you really know what you are doing, and are prepared to take
6280 some heat from netiquette guardians.
6282 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b52
\b2.
\b. s
\bsi
\big
\bgn
\bna
\bat
\btu
\bur
\bre
\be
6285 Default: "~/.signature"
6287 Specifies the filename of your signature, which is appended to all
6288 outgoing messages. If the filename ends with a pipe (``|''), it is
6289 assumed that filename is a shell command and input should be read from
6292 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b53
\b3.
\b. s
\bsi
\bim
\bmp
\bpl
\ble
\be_
\b_s
\bse
\bea
\bar
\brc
\bch
\bh
6295 Default: "~f %s | ~s %s"
6297 Specifies how Mutt should expand a simple search into a real search
6298 pattern. A simple search is one that does not contain any of the ~
6299 operators. See ````patterns'''' for more information on search
6302 For example, if you simply type joe at a search or limit prompt, Mutt
6303 will automatically expand it to the value specified by this variable.
6304 For the default value it would be:
6308 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b54
\b4.
\b. s
\bsm
\bma
\bar
\brt
\bt_
\b_w
\bwr
\bra
\bap
\bp
6313 Controls the display of lines longer than the screen width in the
6314 internal pager. If set, long lines are wrapped at a word boundary. If
6315 unset, lines are simply wrapped at the screen edge. Also see the
6316 ````$markers'''' variable.
6318 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b55
\b5.
\b. s
\bsm
\bmi
\bil
\ble
\bey
\bys
\bs
6320 Type: regular expression
6321 Default: "(>From )|(:[-^]?[][)(><}{|/DP])"
6323 The _
\bp_
\ba_
\bg_
\be_
\br uses this variable to catch some common false positives of
6324 ````$quote_regexp'''', most notably smileys in the beginning of a line
6326 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b56
\b6.
\b. s
\bsl
\ble
\bee
\bep
\bp_
\b_t
\bti
\bim
\bme
\be
6331 Specifies time, in seconds, to pause while displaying certain
6332 informational messages, while moving from folder to folder and after
6333 expunging messages from the current folder. The default is to pause
6334 one second, so a value of zero for this option suppresses the pause.
6335 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b57
\b7.
\b. s
\bso
\bor
\brt
\bt
6340 Specifies how to sort messages in the _
\bi_
\bn_
\bd_
\be_
\bx menu. Valid values are:
6345 mailbox-order (unsorted)
6353 You may optionally use the reverse- prefix to specify reverse sorting
6354 order (example: set sort=reverse-date-sent).
6356 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b58
\b8.
\b. s
\bso
\bor
\brt
\bt_
\b_a
\bal
\bli
\bia
\bas
\bs
6361 Specifies how the entries in the `alias' menu are sorted. The
6362 following are legal values:
6364 address (sort alphabetically by email address)
6365 alias (sort alphabetically by alias name)
6366 unsorted (leave in order specified in .muttrc)
6368 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b25
\b59
\b9.
\b. s
\bso
\bor
\brt
\bt_
\b_a
\bau
\bux
\bx
6373 When sorting by threads, this variable controls how threads are sorted
6374 in relation to other threads, and how the branches of the thread trees
6375 are sorted. This can be set to any value that ````$sort'''' can,
6376 except threads (in that case, mutt will just use date-sent). You can
6377 also specify the last- prefix in addition to the reverse- prefix, but
6378 last- must come after reverse-. The last- prefix causes messages to
6379 be sorted against its siblings by which has the last descendant, using
6380 the rest of sort_aux as an ordering. For instance, set sort_aux=last-
6381 date-received would mean that if a new message is received in a
6382 thread, that thread becomes the last one displayed (or the first, if
6383 you have set sort=reverse-threads.) Note: For reversed ````$sort''''
6384 order ``$sort_aux'' is reversed again (which is not the right thing to
6385 do, but kept to not break any existing configuration setting).
6387 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b60
\b0.
\b. s
\bso
\bor
\brt
\bt_
\b_b
\bbr
\bro
\bow
\bws
\bse
\ber
\br
6392 Specifies how to sort entries in the file browser. By default, the
6393 entries are sorted alphabetically. Valid values:
6395 alpha (alphabetically)
6400 You may optionally use the reverse- prefix to specify reverse sorting
6401 order (example: set sort_browser=reverse-date).
6403 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b61
\b1.
\b. s
\bso
\bor
\brt
\bt_
\b_r
\bre
\be
6408 This variable is only useful when sorting by threads with
6409 ````$strict_threads'''' unset. In that case, it changes the heuristic
6410 mutt uses to thread messages by subject. With sort_re set, mutt will
6411 only attach a message as the child of another message by subject if
6412 the subject of the child message starts with a substring matching the
6413 setting of ````$reply_regexp''''. With sort_re unset, mutt will
6414 attach the message whether or not this is the case, as long as the
6415 non-````$reply_regexp'''' parts of both messages are identical.
6417 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b62
\b2.
\b. s
\bsp
\bpo
\boo
\bol
\blf
\bfi
\bil
\ble
\be
6422 If your spool mailbox is in a non-default place where Mutt cannot find
6423 it, you can specify its location with this variable. Mutt will
6424 automatically set this variable to the value of the environment
6425 variable $MAIL if it is not set.
6427 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b63
\b3.
\b. s
\bst
\bta
\bat
\btu
\bus
\bs_
\b_c
\bch
\bha
\bar
\brs
\bs
6432 Controls the characters used by the "%r" indicator in
6433 ````$status_format''''. The first character is used when the mailbox
6434 is unchanged. The second is used when the mailbox has been changed,
6435 and it needs to be resynchronized. The third is used if the mailbox is
6436 in read-only mode, or if the mailbox will not be written when exiting
6437 that mailbox (You can toggle whether to write changes to a mailbox
6438 with the toggle-write operation, bound by default to "%"). The fourth
6439 is used to indicate that the current folder has been opened in attach-
6440 message mode (Certain operations like composing a new mail, replying,
6441 forwarding, etc. are not permitted in this mode).
6443 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b64
\b4.
\b. s
\bst
\bta
\bat
\btu
\bus
\bs_
\b_f
\bfo
\bor
\brm
\bma
\bat
\bt
6446 Default: "-%r-Mutt: %f [Msgs:%?M?%M/?%m%?n? New:%n?%?o? Old:%o?%?d?
6447 Del:%d?%?F? Flag:%F?%?t? Tag:%t?%?p? Post:%p?%?b? Inc:%b?%?l?
6448 %l?]---(%s/%S)-%>-(%P)---"
6450 Controls the format of the status line displayed in the _
\bi_
\bn_
\bd_
\be_
\bx menu.
6451 This string is similar to ````$index_format'''', but has its own set
6452 of printf()-like sequences:
6454 %
\b%b
\bb number of mailboxes with new mail *
6456 %
\b%d
\bd number of deleted messages *
6458 %
\b%f
\bf the full pathname of the current mailbox
6460 %
\b%F
\bF number of flagged messages *
6462 %
\b%h
\bh local hostname
6464 %
\b%l
\bl size (in bytes) of the current mailbox *
6466 %
\b%L
\bL size (in bytes) of the messages shown (i.e., which match the
6469 %
\b%m
\bm the number of messages in the mailbox *
6471 %
\b%M
\bM the number of messages shown (i.e., which match the current
6474 %
\b%n
\bn number of new messages in the mailbox *
6476 %
\b%o
\bo number of old unread messages
6478 %
\b%p
\bp number of postponed messages *
6480 %
\b%P
\bP percentage of the way through the index
6482 %
\b%r
\br modified/read-only/won't-write/attach-message indicator,
6483 according to ``$status_chars''
6485 %
\b%s
\bs current sorting mode (``$sort'')
6487 %
\b%S
\bS current aux sorting method (``$sort_aux'')
6489 %
\b%t
\bt number of tagged messages *
6491 %
\b%u
\bu number of unread messages *
6493 %
\b%v
\bv Mutt version string
6495 %
\b%V
\bV currently active limit pattern, if any *
6498 right justify the rest of the string and pad with "X"
6501 pad to the end of the line with "X"
6503 * = can be optionally printed if nonzero
6505 Some of the above sequences can be used to optionally print a string
6506 if their value is nonzero. For example, you may only want to see the
6507 number of flagged messages if such messages exist, since zero is not
6508 particularly meaningful. To optionally print a string based upon one
6509 of the above sequences, the following construct is used
6511 %?<sequence_char>?<optional_string>?
6513 where
\e[4msequence_char
\e[24m is a character from the table above, and
6514 \e[4moptional_string
\e[24m is the string you would like printed if
\e[4msequence_char
\e[0m
6515 is nonzero.
\e[4moptional_string
\e[24m
\e[1mmay
\e[22mcontain other sequences as well as
6516 normal text, but you may
\e[1mnot
\e[22mnest optional strings.
6518 Here is an example illustrating how to optionally print the number of
6519 new messages in a mailbox: %?n?%n new messages.?
6521 Additionally you can switch between two strings, the first one, if a
6522 value is zero, the second one, if the value is nonzero, by using the
6523 following construct: %?<sequence_char>?<if_string>&<else_string>?
6525 You can additionally force the result of any printf-like sequence to
6526 be lowercase by prefixing the sequence character with an underscore
6527 (_) sign. For example, if you want to display the local hostname in
6528 lowercase, you would use: %_h
6530 If you prefix the sequence character with a colon (:) character, mutt
6531 will replace any dots in the expansion by underscores. This might be
6532 helpful with IMAP folders that don't like dots in folder names.
6534 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b65
\b5.
\b. s
\bst
\bta
\bat
\btu
\bus
\bs_
\b_o
\bon
\bn_
\b_t
\bto
\bop
\bp
6539 Setting this variable causes the ``status bar'' to be displayed on the
6540 first line of the screen rather than near the bottom.
6542 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b66
\b6.
\b. s
\bst
\btr
\bri
\bic
\bct
\bt_
\b_t
\bth
\bhr
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bds
\bs
6547 If set, threading will only make use of the ``In-Reply-To'' and
6548 ``References'' fields when you ````$sort'''' by message threads. By
6549 default, messages with the same subject are grouped together in
6550 ``pseudo threads.'' This may not always be desirable, such as in a
6551 personal mailbox where you might have several unrelated messages with
6552 the subject ``hi'' which will get grouped together.
6554 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b67
\b7.
\b. s
\bsu
\bus
\bsp
\bpe
\ben
\bnd
\bd
6559 When _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt, mutt won't stop when the user presses the terminal's _
\bs_
\bu_
\bs_
\bp
6560 key, usually ``control-Z''. This is useful if you run mutt inside an
6561 xterm using a command like xterm -e mutt.
6563 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b68
\b8.
\b. t
\bte
\bex
\bxt
\bt_
\b_f
\bfl
\blo
\bow
\bwe
\bed
\bd
6568 When set, mutt will generate text/plain; format=flowed attachments.
6569 This format is easier to handle for some mailing software, and
6570 generally just looks like ordinary text. To actually make use of this
6571 format's features, you'll need support in your editor.
6573 Note that ``$indent_string'' is ignored when this option is set.
6575 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b26
\b69
\b9.
\b. t
\bth
\bhr
\bre
\bea
\bad
\bd_
\b_r
\bre
\bec
\bce
\bei
\biv
\bve
\bed
\bd
6580 When set, mutt uses the date received rather than the date sent to
6581 thread messages by subject.
6583 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b70
\b0.
\b. t
\bth
\bho
\bor
\bro
\bou
\bug
\bgh
\bh_
\b_s
\bse
\bea
\bar
\brc
\bch
\bh
6588 Affects the _
\b~_
\bb and _
\b~_
\bh search operations described in section
6589 ````patterns'''' above. If set, the headers and attachments of
6590 messages to be searched are decoded before searching. If unset,
6591 messages are searched as they appear in the folder.
6593 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b71
\b1.
\b. t
\bti
\bil
\bld
\bde
\be
6598 When set, the internal-pager will pad blank lines to the bottom of the
6599 screen with a tilde (~).
6601 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b72
\b2.
\b. t
\bti
\bim
\bme
\beo
\bou
\but
\bt
6606 This variable controls the _
\bn_
\bu_
\bm_
\bb_
\be_
\br _
\bo_
\bf _
\bs_
\be_
\bc_
\bo_
\bn_
\bd_
\bs Mutt will wait for a key
6607 to be pressed in the main menu before timing out and checking for new
6608 mail. A value of zero or less will cause Mutt to never time out.
6610 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b73
\b3.
\b. t
\btm
\bmp
\bpd
\bdi
\bir
\br
6615 This variable allows you to specify where Mutt will place its
6616 temporary files needed for displaying and composing messages. If this
6617 variable is not set, the environment variable TMPDIR is used. If
6618 TMPDIR is not set then "/tmp" is used.
6620 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b74
\b4.
\b. t
\bto
\bo_
\b_c
\bch
\bha
\bar
\brs
\bs
6625 Controls the character used to indicate mail addressed to you. The
6626 first character is the one used when the mail is NOT addressed to your
6627 address (default: space). The second is used when you are the only
6628 recipient of the message (default: +). The third is when your address
6629 appears in the TO header field, but you are not the only recipient of
6630 the message (default: T). The fourth character is used when your
6631 address is specified in the CC header field, but you are not the only
6632 recipient. The fifth character is used to indicate mail that was sent
6633 by _
\by_
\bo_
\bu. The sixth character is used to indicate when a mail was sent
6634 to a mailing-list you subscribe to (default: L).
6636 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b75
\b5.
\b. t
\btu
\bun
\bnn
\bne
\bel
\bl
6641 Setting this variable will cause mutt to open a pipe to a command
6642 instead of a raw socket. You may be able to use this to set up
6643 preauthenticated connections to your IMAP/POP3 server. Example:
6645 tunnel="ssh -q mailhost.net /usr/local/libexec/imapd"
6647 NOTE: For this example to work you must be able to log in to the
6648 remote machine without having to enter a password.
6650 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b76
\b6.
\b. u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_8
\b8b
\bbi
\bit
\btm
\bmi
\bim
\bme
\be
6655 W
\bWa
\bar
\brn
\bni
\bin
\bng
\bg:
\b: do not set this variable unless you are using a version of
6656 sendmail which supports the -B8BITMIME flag (such as sendmail 8.8.x)
6657 or you may not be able to send mail.
6659 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will invoke ````$sendmail'''' with the -B8BITMIME flag
6660 when sending 8-bit messages to enable ESMTP negotiation.
6662 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b77
\b7.
\b. u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_d
\bdo
\bom
\bma
\bai
\bin
\bn
6667 When set, Mutt will qualify all local addresses (ones without the
6668 @host portion) with the value of ````$hostname''''. If _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt, no
6669 addresses will be qualified.
6671 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b78
\b8.
\b. u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_f
\bfr
\bro
\bom
\bm
6676 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will generate the `From:' header field when sending
6677 messages. If _
\bu_
\bn_
\bs_
\be_
\bt, no `From:' header field will be generated unless
6678 the user explicitly sets one using the ````my_hdr'''' command.
6680 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b27
\b79
\b9.
\b. u
\bus
\bse
\be_
\b_i
\bip
\bpv
\bv6
\b6
6685 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will look for IPv6 addresses of hosts it tries to
6686 contact. If this option is unset, Mutt will restrict itself to IPv4
6687 addresses. Normally, the default should work.
6689 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b80
\b0.
\b. u
\bus
\bse
\ber
\br_
\b_a
\bag
\bge
\ben
\bnt
\bt
6694 When _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, mutt will add a "User-Agent" header to outgoing messages,
6695 indicating which version of mutt was used for composing them.
6697 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b81
\b1.
\b. v
\bvi
\bis
\bsu
\bua
\bal
\bl
6702 Specifies the visual editor to invoke when the _
\b~_
\bv command is given in
6705 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b82
\b2.
\b. w
\bwa
\bai
\bit
\bt_
\b_k
\bke
\bey
\by
6710 Controls whether Mutt will ask you to press a key after _
\bs_
\bh_
\be_
\bl_
\bl_
\b- _
\be_
\bs_
\bc_
\ba_
\bp_
\be,
6711 _
\bp_
\bi_
\bp_
\be_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bs_
\bs_
\ba_
\bg_
\be, _
\bp_
\bi_
\bp_
\be_
\b-_
\be_
\bn_
\bt_
\br_
\by, _
\bp_
\br_
\bi_
\bn_
\bt_
\b-_
\bm_
\be_
\bs_
\bs_
\ba_
\bg_
\be, and _
\bp_
\br_
\bi_
\bn_
\bt_
\b-_
\be_
\bn_
\bt_
\br_
\by commands.
6713 It is also used when viewing attachments with ````auto_view'''',
6714 provided that the corresponding mailcap entry has a _
\bn_
\be_
\be_
\bd_
\bs_
\bt_
\be_
\br_
\bm_
\bi_
\bn_
\ba_
\bl
6715 flag, and the external program is interactive.
6717 When set, Mutt will always ask for a key. When unset, Mutt will wait
6718 for a key only if the external command returned a non-zero status.
6720 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b83
\b3.
\b. w
\bwe
\bee
\bed
\bd
6725 When set, mutt will weed headers when when displaying, forwarding,
6726 printing, or replying to messages.
6728 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b84
\b4.
\b. w
\bwr
\bra
\bap
\bp_
\b_s
\bse
\bea
\bar
\brc
\bch
\bh
6733 Controls whether searches wrap around the end of the mailbox.
6735 When set, searches will wrap around the first (or last) message. When
6736 unset, searches will not wrap.
6738 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b85
\b5.
\b. w
\bwr
\bra
\bap
\bpm
\bma
\bar
\brg
\bgi
\bin
\bn
6743 Controls the size of the margin remaining at the right side of the
6744 terminal when mutt's pager does smart wrapping.
6746 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b86
\b6.
\b. w
\bwr
\bri
\bit
\bte
\be_
\b_i
\bin
\bnc
\bc
6751 When writing a mailbox, a message will be printed every _
\bw_
\br_
\bi_
\bt_
\be_
\b__
\bi_
\bn_
\bc
6752 messages to indicate progress. If set to 0, only a single message
6753 will be displayed before writing a mailbox.
6755 Also see the ````$read_inc'''' variable.
6757 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b87
\b7.
\b. w
\bwr
\bri
\bit
\bte
\be_
\b_b
\bbc
\bcc
\bc
6762 Controls whether mutt writes out the Bcc header when preparing
6763 messages to be sent. Exim users may wish to use this.
6765 6
\b6.
\b.3
\b3.
\b.2
\b28
\b88
\b8.
\b. x
\bx_
\b_c
\bco
\bom
\bmm
\bme
\ben
\bnt
\bt_
\b_t
\bto
\bo
6770 If _
\bs_
\be_
\bt, Mutt will add ``X-Comment-To:'' field (that contains full name
6771 of original article author) to article that followuped to newsgroup.
6773 \e[1m6.4. Functions
\e[0m
6775 The following is the list of available functions listed by the mapping
6776 in which they are available. The default key setting is given, and an
6777 explanation of what the function does. The key bindings of these
6778 functions can be changed with the ``bind'' command.
6780 \e[1m6.4.1. generic
\e[0m
6782 The
\e[4mgeneric
\e[24m menu is not a real menu, but specifies common functions
6783 (such as movement) available in all menus except for
\e[4mpager
\e[24m and
\e[4meditor
\e[24m.
6784 Changing settings for this menu will affect the default bindings for
6785 all menus (except as noted).
6787 bottom-page L move to the bottom of the page
6788 current-bottom not bound move current entry to bottom of page
6789 current-middle not bound move current entry to middle of page
6790 current-top not bound move current entry to top of page
6791 enter-command : enter a muttrc command
6792 exit q exit this menu
6793 first-entry = move to the first entry
6794 half-down ] scroll down 1/2 page
6795 half-up [ scroll up 1/2 page
6797 jump number jump to an index number
6798 last-entry * move to the last entry
6799 middle-page M move to the middle of the page
6800 next-entry j move to the next entry
6801 next-line > scroll down one line
6802 next-page z move to the next page
6803 previous-entry k move to the previous entry
6804 previous-line < scroll up one line
6805 previous-page Z move to the previous page
6806 refresh ^L clear and redraw the screen
6807 search / search for a regular expression
6808 search-next n search for next match
6809 search-opposite not bound search for next match in opposite direction
6810 search-reverse ESC / search backwards for a regular expression
6811 select-entry RET select the current entry
6812 shell-escape ! run a program in a subshell
6813 tag-entry t toggle the tag on the current entry
6814 tag-prefix ; apply next command to tagged entries
6815 tag-prefix-cond not bound apply next function ONLY to tagged messages
6816 top-page H move to the top of the page
6817 what-key not bound display the keycode for a key press
6819 \e[1m6.4.2. index
\e[0m
6821 bounce-message b remail a message to another user
6822 change-folder c open a different folder
6823 change-folder-readonly ESC c open a different folder in read only mode
6824 check-traditional-pgp ESC P check for classic pgp
6825 clear-flag W clear a status flag from a message
6826 copy-message C copy a message to a file/mailbox
6827 create-alias a create an alias from a message sender
6828 decode-copy ESC C decode a message and copy it to a file/mailbox
6829 decode-save ESC s decode a message and save it to a file/mailbox
6830 delete-message d delete the current entry
6831 delete-pattern D delete messages matching a pattern
6832 delete-subthread ESC d delete all messages in subthread
6833 delete-thread ^D delete all messages in thread
6834 display-address @ display full address of sender
6835 display-toggle-weed h display message and toggle header weeding
6836 display-message RET display a message
6837 edit e edit the current message
6838 edit-type ^E edit the current message's Content-Type
6839 exit x exit without saving changes
6840 extract-keys ^K extract PGP public keys
6841 fetch-mail G retrieve mail from POP server
6842 flag-message F toggle a message's 'important' flag
6843 forget-passphrase ^F wipe PGP passphrase from memory
6844 forward-message f forward a message with comments
6845 group-reply g reply to all recipients
6846 limit l show only messages matching a pattern
6847 list-reply L reply to specified mailing list
6848 mail m compose a new mail message
6849 mail-key ESC k mail a PGP public key
6850 next-new TAB jump to the next new message
6851 next-subthread ESC n jump to the next subthread
6852 next-thread ^N jump to the next thread
6853 next-undeleted j move to the next undeleted message
6854 next-unread not bound jump to the next unread message
6855 parent-message P jump to parent message in thread
6856 pipe-message | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
6857 previous-new ESC TAB jump to the previous new message
6858 previous-page Z move to the previous page
6859 previous-subthread ESC p jump to previous subthread
6860 previous-thread ^P jump to previous thread
6861 previous-undeleted k move to the last undelete message
6862 previous-unread not bound jump to the previous unread message
6863 print-message p print the current entry
6864 query Q query external program for addresses
6865 quit q save changes to mailbox and quit
6866 read-subthread ESC r mark the current subthread as read
6867 read-thread ^R mark the current thread as read
6868 recall-message R recall a postponed message
6869 reply r reply to a message
6870 resend-message ESC e resend message and preserve MIME structure
6871 save-message s save message/attachment to a file
6872 set-flag w set a status flag on a message
6873 show-version V show the Mutt version number and date
6874 show-limit ESC l show currently active limit pattern, if any
6875 sort-mailbox o sort messages
6876 sort-reverse O sort messages in reverse order
6877 sync-mailbox $ save changes to mailbox
6878 tag-pattern T tag messages matching a pattern
6879 tag-thread ESC t tag/untag all messages in the current thread
6880 toggle-new N toggle a message's 'new' flag
6881 toggle-write % toggle whether the mailbox will be rewritten
6882 undelete-message u undelete the current entry
6883 undelete-pattern U undelete messages matching a pattern
6884 undelete-subthread ESC u undelete all messages in subthread
6885 undelete-thread ^U undelete all messages in thread
6886 untag-pattern ^T untag messages matching a pattern
6887 view-attachments v show MIME attachments
6889 \e[1m6.4.3. pager
\e[0m
6891 bottom not bound jump to the bottom of the message
6892 bounce-message b remail a message to another user
6893 change-folder c open a different folder
6894 change-folder-readonly ESC c open a different folder in read only mode
6895 check-traditional-pgp ESC P check for classic pgp
6896 copy-message C copy a message to a file/mailbox
6897 create-alias a create an alias from a message sender
6898 decode-copy ESC C decode a message and copy it to a file/mailbox
6899 decode-save ESC s decode a message and save it to a file/mailbox
6900 delete-message d delete the current entry
6901 delete-subthread ESC d delete all messages in subthread
6902 delete-thread ^D delete all messages in thread
6903 display-address @ display full address of sender
6904 display-toggle-weed h display message and toggle header weeding
6905 edit e edit the current message
6906 edit-type ^E edit the current message's Content-Type
6907 enter-command : enter a muttrc command
6908 exit i return to the main-menu
6909 extract-keys ^K extract PGP public keys
6910 flag-message F toggle a message's 'important' flag
6911 forget-passphrase ^F wipe PGP passphrase from memory
6912 forward-message f forward a message with comments
6913 group-reply g reply to all recipients
6914 half-up not bound move up one-half page
6915 half-down not bound move down one-half page
6917 list-reply L reply to specified mailing list
6918 mail m compose a new mail message
6919 mail-key ESC k mail a PGP public key
6920 mark-as-new N toggle a message's 'new' flag
6921 next-line RET scroll down one line
6922 next-entry J move to the next entry
6923 next-new TAB jump to the next new message
6924 next-page move to the next page
6925 next-subthread ESC n jump to the next subthread
6926 next-thread ^N jump to the next thread
6927 next-undeleted j move to the next undeleted message
6928 next-unread not bound jump to the next unread message
6929 parent-message P jump to parent message in thread
6930 pipe-message | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
6931 previous-line BackSpace scroll up one line
6932 previous-entry K move to the previous entry
6933 previous-new not bound jump to the previous new message
6934 previous-page - move to the previous page
6935 previous-subthread ESC p jump to previous subthread
6936 previous-thread ^P jump to previous thread
6937 previous-undeleted k move to the last undelete message
6938 previous-unread not bound jump to the previous unread message
6939 print-message p print the current entry
6940 quit Q save changes to mailbox and quit
6941 read-subthread ESC r mark the current subthread as read
6942 read-thread ^R mark the current thread as read
6943 recall-message R recall a postponed message
6944 redraw-screen ^L clear and redraw the screen
6945 reply r reply to a message
6946 save-message s save message/attachment to a file
6947 search / search for a regular expression
6948 search-next n search for next match
6949 search-opposite not bound search for next match in opposite direction
6950 search-reverse ESC / search backwards for a regular expression
6951 search-toggle \ toggle search pattern coloring
6952 shell-escape ! invoke a command in a subshell
6953 show-version V show the Mutt version number and date
6954 skip-quoted S skip beyond quoted text
6955 sync-mailbox $ save changes to mailbox
6956 tag-message t tag a message
6957 toggle-quoted T toggle display of quoted text
6958 top ^ jump to the top of the message
6959 undelete-message u undelete the current entry
6960 undelete-subthread ESC u undelete all messages in subthread
6961 undelete-thread ^U undelete all messages in thread
6962 view-attachments v show MIME attachments
6964 \e[1m6.4.4. alias
\e[0m
6966 search / search for a regular expression
6967 search-next n search for next match
6968 search-reverse ESC / search backwards for a regular expression
6970 \e[1m6.4.5. query
\e[0m
6972 create-alias a create an alias from a message sender
6973 mail m compose a new mail message
6974 query Q query external program for addresses
6975 query-append A append new query results to current results
6976 search / search for a regular expression
6977 search-next n search for next match
6978 search-opposite not bound search for next match in opposite direction
6979 search-reverse ESC / search backwards for a regular expression
6981 \e[1m6.4.6. attach
\e[0m
6983 bounce-message b remail a message to another user
6984 collapse-parts v toggle display of subparts
6985 delete-entry d delete the current entry
6986 display-toggle-weed h display message and toggle header weeding
6987 edit-type ^E edit the current entry's Content-Type
6988 extract-keys ^K extract PGP public keys
6989 forward-message f forward a message with comments
6990 group-reply g reply to all recipients
6991 list-reply L reply to specified mailing list
6992 pipe-entry | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
6993 print-entry p print the current entry
6994 reply r reply to a message
6995 resend-message ESC e resend message and preserve MIME structure
6996 save-entry s save message/attachment to a file
6997 undelete-entry u undelete the current entry
6998 view-attach RET view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary
6999 view-mailcap m force viewing of attachment using mailcap
7000 view-text T view attachment as text
7002 \e[1m6.4.7. compose
\e[0m
7004 attach-file a attach a file(s) to this message
7005 attach-message A attach message(s) to this message
7006 attach-key ESC k attach a PGP public key
7007 copy-file C save message/attachment to a file
7008 detach-file D delete the current entry
7009 display-toggle-weed h display message and toggle header weeding
7010 edit-bcc b edit the BCC list
7011 edit-cc c edit the CC list
7012 edit-description d edit attachment description
7013 edit-encoding ^E edit attachment transfer-encoding
7014 edit-fcc f enter a file to save a copy of this message in
7015 edit-from ESC f edit the from: field
7016 edit-file ^X e edit the file to be attached
7017 edit-headers E edit the message with headers
7018 edit e edit the message
7019 edit-mime m edit attachment using mailcap entry
7020 edit-reply-to r edit the Reply-To field
7021 edit-subject s edit the subject of this message
7022 edit-to t edit the TO list
7023 edit-type ^T edit attachment type
7024 filter-entry F filter attachment through a shell command
7025 forget-passphrase ^F wipe PGP passphrase from memory
7026 ispell i run ispell on the message
7027 new-mime n compose new attachment using mailcap entry
7028 pgp-menu p show PGP options
7029 pipe-entry | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
7030 postpone-message P save this message to send later
7031 print-entry l print the current entry
7032 rename-file R rename/move an attached file
7033 send-message y send the message
7034 toggle-unlink u toggle whether to delete file after sending it
7035 view-attach RET view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary
7036 write-fcc w write the message to a folder
7038 \e[1m6.4.8. postpone
\e[0m
7040 delete-entry d delete the current entry
7041 undelete-entry u undelete the current entry
7043 \e[1m6.4.9. browser
\e[0m
7045 change-dir c change directories
7046 check-new TAB check mailboxes for new mail
7047 enter-mask m enter a file mask
7048 search / search for a regular expression
7049 search-next n search for next match
7050 search-reverse ESC / search backwards for a regular expression
7051 select-new N select a new file in this directory
7052 sort o sort messages
7053 sort-reverse O sort messages in reverse order
7054 toggle-mailboxes TAB toggle whether to browse mailboxes or all files
7055 view-file SPACE view file
7056 subscribe s subscribe to current mailbox (IMAP Only)
7057 unsubscribe u unsubscribe to current mailbox (IMAP Only)
7058 toggle-subscribed T toggle view all/subscribed mailboxes (IMAP Only)
7060 \e[1m6.4.10. pgp
\e[0m
7062 view-name % view the key's user id
7063 verify-key c verify a PGP public key
7065 \e[1m6.4.11. editor
\e[0m
7067 backspace BackSpace delete the char in front of the cursor
7068 backward-char ^B move the cursor one character to the left
7069 backward-word ESC b move the cursor to the previous word
7070 bol ^A jump to the beginning of the line
7071 buffy-cycle Space cycle among incoming mailboxes
7072 capitalize-word ESC c uppercase the first character in the word
7073 complete TAB complete filename or alias
7074 complete-query ^T complete address with query
7075 delete-char ^D delete the char under the cursor
7076 downcase-word ESC l lowercase all characters in current word
7077 eol ^E jump to the end of the line
7078 forward-char ^F move the cursor one character to the right
7079 forward-word ESC f move the cursor to the next word
7080 history-down not bound scroll down through the history list
7081 history-up not bound scroll up through the history list
7082 kill-eol ^K delete chars from cursor to end of line
7083 kill-eow ESC d delete chars from cursor to end of word
7084 kill-line ^U delete all chars on the line
7085 kill-word ^W delete the word in front of the cursor
7086 quote-char ^V quote the next typed key
7087 transpose-chars not bound transpose character under cursor with previous
7088 upcase-word ESC u uppercase all characters in current word
7090 \e[1m7. Miscellany
\e[0m
7092 \e[1m7.1. Acknowledgements
\e[0m
7094 Kari Hurtta <kari.hurtta@fmi.fi> co-developed the original MIME
7095 parsing code back in the ELM-ME days.
7097 The following people have been very helpful to the development of
7100 Vikas Agnihotri <vikasa@writeme.com>,
7101 Francois Berjon <Francois.Berjon@aar.alcatel-alsthom.fr>,
7102 Aric Blumer <aric@fore.com>,
7103 John Capo <jc@irbs.com>,
7104 David Champion <dgc@uchicago.edu,
7105 Brendan Cully <brendan@kublai.com>,
7106 Liviu Daia <daia@stoilow.imar.ro>,
7107 Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@herndon4.his.com>,
7108 David DeSimone <fox@convex.hp.com>,
7109 Nickolay N. Dudorov <nnd@wint.itfs.nsk.su>,
7110 Ruslan Ermilov <ru@freebsd.org>,
7111 Edmund Grimley Evans <edmundo@rano.org,
7112 Michael Finken <finken@conware.de>,
7113 Sven Guckes <guckes@math.fu-berlin.de>,
7114 Lars Hecking <lhecking@nmrc.ie>,
7115 Mark Holloman <holloman@nando.net>,
7116 Andreas Holzmann <holzmann@fmi.uni-passau.de>,
7117 Marco d'Itri <md@linux.it>,
7118 Björn Jacke <bjacke@suse.com>,
7119 Byrial Jensen <byrial@image.dk>,
7120 David Jeske <jeske@igcom.net>,
7121 Christophe Kalt <kalt@hugo.int-evry.fr>,
7122 Tommi Komulainen <Tommi.Komulainen@iki.fi>,
7123 Felix von Leitner (a.k.a ``Fefe'') <leitner@math.fu-berlin.de>,
7124 Brandon Long <blong@fiction.net>,
7125 Jimmy Mäkelä <jmy@flashback.net>,
7126 Lars Marowsky-Bree <lmb@pointer.in-minden.de>,
7127 Thomas ``Mike'' Michlmayr <mike@cosy.sbg.ac.at>,
7128 Andrew W. Nosenko <awn@bcs.zp.ua>,
7129 David O'Brien <obrien@Nuxi.cs.ucdavis.edu>,
7130 Clint Olsen <olsenc@ichips.intel.com>,
7131 Park Myeong Seok <pms@romance.kaist.ac.kr>,
7132 Thomas Parmelan <tom@ankh.fr.eu.org>,
7133 Ollivier Robert <roberto@keltia.freenix.fr>,
7134 Thomas Roessler <roessler@does-not-exist.org>,
7135 Roland Rosenfeld <roland@spinnaker.de>,
7136 TAKIZAWA Takashi <taki@luna.email.ne.jp>,
7137 Allain Thivillon <Allain.Thivillon@alma.fr>,
7138 Gero Treuner <gero@faveve.uni-stuttgart.de>,
7139 Vsevolod Volkov <vvv@lucky.net>,
7140 Ken Weinert <kenw@ihs.com>
7142 \e[1m7.2. About this document
\e[0m
7144 This document was written in SGML, and then rendered using the sgml-